AT7A1818OM

User Manual: 2018 Honda HR-V Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 503

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018

OWNER’S MANUAL

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

0 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

3 WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine
exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not
idle the engine except as necessary, service
your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle.

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

1 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.

Software End User License Agreement

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by
the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which
contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User
License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your
use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,
functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of
the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and
conditions of the End User License Agreement.
You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software
by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda
Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop
100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice
This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage
this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

2 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.

2 Safe Driving P. 29
For Safe Driving P. 30

Seat Belts P. 35

Airbags P. 44

2 Instrument Panel P. 73
Indicators P. 74

Gauges and Displays P. 90

2 Controls P. 95
Clock P. 96
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 98
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 121
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 124
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 152

2 Features P. 177
Audio System P. 178
Audio System Basic Operation P. 184, 205
Customized Features P. 252
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 274, 297

2 Driving P. 327
Before Driving P. 328
Towing a Trailer P. 333
Parking Your Vehicle P. 385
Multi-View Rear Camera P. 386

The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.

2 Maintenance P. 391
Before Performing Maintenance P. 392
Maintenance MinderTM P. 395
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 419
Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 437

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 445
Tools P. 446
Overheating P. 463

If a Tire Goes Flat P. 448
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 465

Fuses P. 470

2 Information P. 479
Specifications P. 480
Emissions Testing P. 485

Identification Numbers P. 482
Warranty Coverages P. 487

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

3 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 57

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 70

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 115
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 123
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 140
Heating and Cooling System * P. 163

P. 4

Safety Labels P. 71

Security System P. 118
Adjusting the Seats P. 142
Climate Control System * P. 167

Audio Error Messages P. 233

General Information on the Audio System P. 237

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 337
Refueling P. 388

When Driving P. 339
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 390

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 399
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423
Cleaning P. 438

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 411
Battery P. 433
Accessories and Modifications P. 443

Engine Does Not Start P. 457
Emergency Towing P. 475

Jump Starting P. 460
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 462
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 476

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 483
Authorized Manuals P. 489

Reporting Safety Defects P. 484
Customer Service Information P. 490

Braking P. 377

Safe Driving

P. 29

Instrument Panel

P. 73

Controls

P. 95

Features

P. 177

Driving

P. 327

Maintenance

P. 391

Handling the Unexpected

P. 445

Information

P. 479

Index

P. 492

Remote Transmitter Care P. 435

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

4 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ System Indicators (P74)
❙ Gauges (P90)
❙ Information Display (P91)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Audio/Information Screen (P185, 206)
❙ Audio System (P178)
❙ Navigation System *
() See the Navigation System Manual

❙ Heating and Cooling System *
(P163)

❙ Climate Control System * (P167)
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P137)
❙ Heated Mirror Icon * (P137)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P125)
❙ Ignition Switch * (P124)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P139)
❙ ECON Button * (P357)
❙ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button * (P374)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P369)
❙ Heated Windshield Button * (P138)
❙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button * (P366)
❙ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Button * (P363)
*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

5 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P129)
❙ Fog Lights * (P132)
❙ LaneWatchTM* (P370)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift Down) * (P 353)
❙
(Display) Button * (P206)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P91)
❙ Brightness Control (P136)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift Up) * (P353)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P134)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P358)
❙ Horn (Press an area around

❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
(P274, 297)

❙ Voice Control Buttons (P274, 297)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
() See the Navigation System Manual

❙ Audio Remote Control Buttons (P182)
* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

6 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Power Window Switches (P121)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P109)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P141)
❙ Interior Fuse Boxes (P472)
❙ Driver’s Front Airbag (P47)
❙ Passenger’s Front Airbag (P47)
❙ Seat Heater Icons * (P162)
❙ Glove Box (P154)
❙ Shift Lever
Continuously Variable
Transmission * (P348, 350)
Manual Transmission * (P354)

❙ Accessory Power Socket (P158)
❙ USB Port(s) (P179)
❙ HDMI® Port * (P180)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack * (P180)
❙ Electric Parking Brake Switch (P377)
❙ Automatic Brake Hold Button (P380)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P400)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P389)
6

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

7 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

❙ Map Lights (P153)
❙ Moonroof Switch * (P123)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P41)
❙ Seat Belts (P35)
❙ Seat Belts (Installing a Child Seat) (P64)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P66)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Coat Hook (P159)
❙ Ceiling Light (P152)

❙ Rearview Mirror (P140)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P53)
❙ Side Airbags (P51)
❙ Front Seat (P142)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
❙ Rear Seat (P148)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P62)
❙ Cargo Area Light (P153)
❙ Cargo Cover * (P161)
❙ Cargo Floor Box (P157)
❙ Accessory Power Socket * (P158)

(P158)

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

8 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P399)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P134, 419)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P141)
❙ Side Turn Signal Lights * (P129, 414)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P101)
❙ Headlights (P129, 411)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P129, 412)
❙ Front Side Marker Lights (P129, 413)
❙ Tires (P423, 448)
❙ Fog Lights * (P132, 413)
❙ How to Refuel (P389)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P417)
❙ Rear Wiper (P135, 421)
❙ Rear License Plate Lights (P418)
❙ Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P115)
❙ Tailgate Release Button (P116)
❙ Lock Button (P101)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P386)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P416)
❙ Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights (P417)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P415)

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

9 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Eco Assist® System
Quick Reference Guide

Ambient Meter
● Changes color to reflect your driving style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Light green: Moderate acceleration/deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in accordance with
your brake or accelerator pedal operation.
● You can change color while the vehicle is at a stop in
ACCESSORY (q , LOCK (0 or VEHICLE OFF with the
ambient meter on. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly; the color changes from white*1, blue,
purple, pink, red, amber to yellow.
*1 : Default setting

2 Changing Ring Color (P94)

ECON Mode Indicator *
(P83)
Comes on when the ECON button is
pressed.

ECON Button * (P357)
Helps maximize your fuel economy.

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

10 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

Safe Driving

金曜日

午後１時２３分

(P 29)

Quick Reference Guide

Airbags (P44)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P57)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P70)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain
carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces
where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P35)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.

Before Driving Checklist (P34)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

11 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

Instrument Panel

金曜日

午後１時２３分

(P73)

Lights Indicators
Fog Light Indicator

Tachometer

Speedometer
Information Display

System Indicators
Smart Entry System
Indicator *

High Beam Indicator
Lights On Indicator

U.S.

System Indicators

Canada

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
High Temperature
Indicator (Red)
Low Temperature
Indicator (Blue)
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) System Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
Automatic Brake Hold
System Indicator
U.S.

Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator

Canada

Electric Parking Brake
System Indicator
U.S.

Canada

Electric Parking Brake
Indicator

Starter System
Indicator *

Security System
Alarm Indicator
M (7-speed manual shift mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator *

Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Door and Tailgate
Open Indicator

Quick Reference Guide

Gauges (P90)/Information Display (P91)/System Indicators (P74)

Washer Level Indicator *

Fuel Gauge

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator

Shift Lever Position Indicator *
U.S.

System Indicators
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
ECON Mode
Indicator *
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW)
Indicator *
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator *

System Indicators
CRUISE MAIN Indicator
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
U.S. models only

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
System Indicator *

Brake System Indicator
(Red)

Canada

U.S.

Brake System Indicator
(Amber)

Canada

Low Fuel Indicator
Continuously variable
transmission models

Brake Depressing
Indicator
Manual transmission models

Brake Depressing
Indicator
* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

12 ページ

Controls

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

(P95)

Quick Reference Guide

Clock (P96)

Models with display audio system

Models with color audio system

Models with navigation system

The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.

HOME

VOL

Models without navigation system
MENU

BACK

Select the
Settings.

Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK
button.

Select System, Clock, then Clock
Adjustment.

Rotate
.

to change hour, then press

Touch the 3 / 4 icon to adjust the
numbers up or down.

Rotate
press .

to change minute, then

Select OK.

Select SET, then press

Clock

The clock in the information display is
automatically updated along with the audio
system’s clock display.

(HOME) icon, then select

These indications are used to show how to
operate the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob.
• Rotate
to select.
• Press to enter.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

13 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

ENGINE START/STOP
Button * (P125)

午後１時２３分

Turn Signals (P129)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right

Wipers and Washers
(P134)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring *
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps
: Higher speed, more sweeps
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.

Left

Quick Reference Guide

Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.

金曜日

Lights (P129)
Light Control Switches

High Beam

MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

Low Beam
Flashing

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

14 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

Steering Wheel (P139)
Quick Reference Guide

● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside

Tailgate (P115)

(P108)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it in one motion.

To adjust

To lock
Models without smart entry system

● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.

● With all the doors unlocked, press the
tailgate release button and lift open the
tailgate.
Models with smart entry system

● Press the tailgate release button to
unlock and open the tailgate when you
carry the smart entry remote.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

15 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

Power Door Mirrors
(P141)

Selector Switch

午後１時２３分

Power Windows (P121)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button

Quick Reference Guide

● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

金曜日

Adjustment Switch

Window Switch

Indicator

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

16 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Heating and Cooling System * (P163)
Quick Reference Guide

●
●
●
●
●

Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed.
Rotate the mode control dial (
/
/
/
/
) to select the vents air flows from.
Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
Rotate the mode control dial to
to defrost the windshield.

Air flows
from
dashboard
vents.

Air flows from
floor and
dashboard
vents.

Air flows
from floor
vents.

Air flows from
floor and
windshield
defroster vents.

Air flows from
windshield
defroster
vents.

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Mode Control Dial

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(Recirculation) Button

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

17 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Climate Control System * (P167)
Select the AUTO icon to activate the climate control system.
Select the
icon to turn the system on or off.
Select the
icon to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable.
() See the Navigation System Manual for complete details.

Quick Reference Guide

●
●
●
●

Models without SYNC icon

Air flows from
dashboard
vents.

Air flows from
floor and
dashboard vents.

Air flows from
floor vents.

Air flows from
floor and
windshield
defroster vents.

Temperature Control Icons

Fan Control Icons

AUTO Icon

(On/Off) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon
(Recirculation) Icon

(Windshield Defroster) Icon
(Fresh Air) Icon
Mode Control Icon
* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

18 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Models with SYNC icon

Quick Reference Guide

Air flows from
dashboard
vents.
Fan Control Icons

Air flows from
floor and
dashboard vents.

Air flows from
floor vents.

Air flows from
floor and
windshield
defroster vents.
Mode Control Icon

Driver Side Temperature
Control Icons

Passenger Side
Temperature Control
Icons

AUTO Icon

(On/Off) Icon
SYNC (Synchronization) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon
(Recirculation) Icon

(Windshield Defroster) Icon

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

19 ページ

Features

２０１７年６月３０日

(P177)

(P182)
(+ / (- /

午後１時２３分

Audio System (P178)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Models with color audio system (P184)

Buttons

Audio/Information Screen
(Day/Night)
Button

RADIO Button
SOURCE Button
● (+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/
CD/USB/iPod/Bluetooth® Audio/Pandora® */
AhaTM*/Apps *, *1/AUX */AUX HDMI® *.
●
/
Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.

CD/AUX Button

CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button

Quick Reference Guide

Audio Remote Controls

金曜日

(Phone) Button
(Sound) Button

VOL /
(Volume/Power)
Knob

LIST/SELECT Knob

/
(Skip/Seek) Buttons

(Back) Button

MENU/CLOCK Button

Preset Buttons (1-6)

*1 : Appears only when connected to HondaLink®.
* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

20 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Models with display audio system (P205)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen
CD Slot

(Power) Button

(CD Eject) Button
(Day/Night) Button

(Home) Icon

HOME

VOL

VOL (Volume) Icons
(Menu) Icon
(Back) Icon

BACK

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

21 ページ

Driving

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

(P327)

(P348, 350)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Shifting
Models with
paddle shifters

Models without
paddle shifters

Depress the brake pedal and press
the release button to move out of (P .
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Press the release button to move
the shift lever.

Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
On models with paddle shifters,
7-speed mode can be used
temporarily.
Models with paddle shifters

Drive (S)
7-speed manual shift mode can
be used.

When the shift lever is in (S

● Pulling a paddle shifter changes the mode from
continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual
shift mode.
● The M indicator and the selected speed number are
displayed in the shift indicator.

When the shift lever is in (D

● Pulling a paddle shifter temporarily changes the mode
from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed
manual shift mode. The selected speed number is
displayed in the shift indicator.

Shift Lever

Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Used when reversing.

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode * (P352)
● Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or
down without removing your hands from the steering
wheel.

Quick Reference Guide

Manual Transmission * (P354)
Continuously Variable Transmission *

Release
Button

(M Indicator

Shift Down (Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter

Shift Indicator

Models without paddle shifters

Drive (S)
● Better acceleration
● Used to increase engine braking
● Used when going up or down hills
Models without paddle shifters

Low
● Used to further increase engine braking
● Used when going up or down hills
* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

22 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

VSA® On and Off (P369)
Quick Reference Guide

● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Refueling (P388)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 L)

Pull the fuel fill door
release handle.

Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.

Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.

After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.

Cruise Control (P358)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the -/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
U.S. models only

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P373)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

23 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

Maintenance

金曜日

午後１時２３分

(P391)

Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.

Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then
raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly,
you can release the lever.

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.

Quick Reference Guide

Under the Hood (P399)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and window washer fluid.
Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.

Wiper Blades (P419)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.

Tires (P423)

Lights (P411)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter driving.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

24 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Handling the Unexpected
Quick Reference Guide

Flat Tire (P448)

Engine Won’t Start (P457) Overheating (P463)

● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
cargo area.

● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.

● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.

Indicators Come On

Blown Fuse (P470)

Emergency Towing (P475)

(P465)

● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.

● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.

● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.

(P445)

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

25 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

What to Do If
The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q *1.
Why?

●

Models without smart entry system
●

Try to turn the steering wheel left and
right while turning the ignition key.

Models with smart entry system
●

Models without smart entry system

The steering wheel may be locked.

Move the steering wheel left and right
after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same
time.

Quick Reference Guide

U.S. models with manual transmission
U.S. models without smart entry system
Canadian models

The shift lever should be moved to (P .

The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?
Models with smart entry system

The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P383)

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

26 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Quick Reference Guide

The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear door
with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the lever
to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?

The beeper sounds when:
● The exterior lights are left on.
Models without smart entry system
●

The key is left in the ignition switch.

Models with smart entry system
●

The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.

Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

27 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.

Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?

●

U.S. models only

I’m seeing an amber
indicator of a tire with an
exclamation point. What is
that?

●

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
Check if the transmission is in (P or (N . If so, select any other
position.

Quick Reference Guide

Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If
you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate
the system.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P373)

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

28 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

29 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions.............. 30
Important Handling Information......... 32
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 33
Safety Checklist ................................. 34
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts ........................ 35
Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 38
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 43
Airbags
Airbag System Components ............... 44
Types of Airbags ................................ 47

Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 47
Side Airbags....................................... 51
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 53
Airbag System Indicators.................... 54
Airbag Care ....................................... 56
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 57
Safety of Infants and Small Children... 59
Safety of Larger Children ................... 68
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas ....................... 70

Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 71

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

30 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

31 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

Safe Driving

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

■ Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more
of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash
in which the children and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also,
depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach
extreme levels, which can result in injury or death. Even if the climate control system
is on, never leave children in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system
can shut off at any time.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

32 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information

Important Handling Information

Safe Driving

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway
driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher
off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping
or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

1Important Handling Information
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover,
read:
2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
P. 346
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 337
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

33 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
9

6
10
7
8
10

6
7
8
9
10
11

Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners

Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

34 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safety Checklist

Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 107

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 142

• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 144

• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 38

• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 57

1Safety Checklist
If the door and tailgate open indicator is on, a door
and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all
doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator P. 80

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

35 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers

■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 64

Continued

1About Your Seat Belts

3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.

Safe Driving

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in
place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,
then extend it slowly.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

36 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Proper use of seat belts

1About Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

■ Seat Belt Reminder

1Seat Belt Reminder

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
before the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while driving until the
driver’s and/or the front passenger’s seat belt
is fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper
may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 57

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

37 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

38 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 142
Safe Driving

Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.

Buckle

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.

Latch
Plate

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

39 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Continued

1Fastening a Seat Belt

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.

Safe Driving

Lap belt
as low as
possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and
then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly
stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing
door.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

40 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
Safe Driving

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
pulling the release outward.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Pull outward

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

41 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

3 WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable
anchor unlatched increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the
detachable anchor is correctly latched.

Small Latch Plate

2. Line up the triangle marks on the small
latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure
the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt
to the anchor buckle.

Safe Driving

1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and
the latch plate from each holding slot in the
ceiling.

Latch Plate

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch
plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

Anchor
Buckle
Latch Plate

3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.
Properly fasten the seat belt the same way
you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.

Anchor
Buckle

Latch Plate

Buckle

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

42 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Advice for Pregnant Women
Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

43 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Safe Driving

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

1Seat Belt Inspection

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

44 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Airbags
Airbag System Components

Safe Driving

8
8

8
11

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

45 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b Two

side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

d An

electronic control unit that, when the
vehicle is on, continually monitors
information about the various impact
sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover
sensor, airbag activators, seat belt
tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit can record such information.

e Automatic

front seat belt tensioners. In
addition, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.

driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.

h Impact

sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

i An

indicator near the shift lever that
alerts you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.

j An indicator on the instrument panel that

Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:

alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k Safing

Sensor

rollover sensor that detects if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.

c Two

g Weight

sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is
approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the
weight of an infant or small child).

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

46 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

■ Important Facts About Your Airbags
Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

47 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.

■ Housing Locations

1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

48 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

49 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Continued

Safe Driving

■ When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help to save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might
occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help to reduce
the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

50 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

Safe Driving

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.

Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor

Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver’s airbag.

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system
has weight sensors.

Passenger’s
Seat Weight
Sensors

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger’s seat.
However, if you do allow a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger’s
seat, note that the system will automatically
turn off the front passenger’s airbag if the
sensors detect that the child is approximately
65 lbs (29 kg) or less.

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
For the advanced airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not cover the passenger’s side dashboard with
a cloth, towel, cover, etc.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
P. 55

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

51 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Safe Driving

■ Housing Locations

1Side Airbags

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.

Housing Location

■ Operation
When
inflated

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

Side Airbag

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

52 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Safe Driving

Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

53 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.

1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
is no passenger in the passenger seat.

Safe Driving

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.

To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

54 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
Safe Driving

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.

■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

55 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
■ When the passenger front airbag off

U.S. models

If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:

• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.

Safe Driving

indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an
infant or small child, on the seat.

1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator

• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger’s seat.

• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.

• An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Canadian models

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 57

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

56 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
Safe Driving

■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-8889-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

57 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

Continued

3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

Safe Driving

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

58 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Safe Driving

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

1Protecting Child Passengers

3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 71

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

59 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants

1Protecting Infants

3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.

Safe Driving

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the
infant is at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat
and the seat in front of it.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat
installed in a rear seating position:
The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly
detect the actual weight of the occupant.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 44

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

60 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children
Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations
of a rearward facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly
secured forward facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations
for the forward facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Smaller Children

3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

61 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Selecting a Child Seat

1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates
as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing
your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

62 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
Marks
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position.

Rigid Type

Lower Anchors

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

3 WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same
anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not
be strong enough to hold two child seat
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

63 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

3 WARNING
Safe Driving

Do not use the lower inner anchors of the
outer rear seats to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat to the rear center
seat, unless the manufacturer’s instructions
for that system permit the use of inner
anchors with the stated spacing.

Flexible Type

4. Remove the cargo cover *.
Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

* Not available on all models

2 Cargo Cover P. 161

5. Route the tether strap between the head
restraint legs, and secure the tether strap
hook to the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
9. Reinstall the cargo cover *.

Continued

Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the
rear center seat
Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower
anchors which are used to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat. The rear center seat, however,
is not equipped with anchors of any kind.
The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a
standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The
distance between the two inner anchors is 14.1
inches (357.8 mm).
LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted
with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the
rear center seat. However, a system fitted with
flexible-type attachments can be installed in the
center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s
instructions for that system permit the use of the
inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Before seating a child, make sure that the system is
properly attached to both the lower anchors and
tether anchors.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

64 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
Safe Driving

A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely
necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
3. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
4. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
5. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 4 – 5.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

65 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
Safe Driving

6. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; less than one inch of movement
should occur near the seat belt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

66 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Adding Security with a Tether
Safe Driving

Tether
Anchorage
Points

Tether
Anchorage
Point

Two tether anchorage points are provided
behind the rear outer seating positions and
one in the ceiling for the rear center. If you
have a child restraint system that comes with
a tether but can be installed with a seat belt,
the tether may be used for additional security.

1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

67 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Anchor

■ Using an outer anchor
1. Remove the cargo cover *.
2 Cargo Cover P. 161

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Anchor Cover

* Not available on all models

Safe Driving

2. Put the outer head restraint to its upper
most position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
4. Reinstall the cargo cover *.

■ Using the center anchor
1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

68 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
Safe Driving

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.

■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

69 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

■ Booster Seats

1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. six years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

70 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system */climate control
system * as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating and cooling system */climate control system * in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

* Not available on all models

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

71 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

Sun Visor
U.S. models

Safe Driving

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.

Canadian models

Sun Visor
Dashboard

U.S. models only

Radiator Cap

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

72 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

73 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 74
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 87
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 90
Information Display............................ 91

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

74 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Indicators

Indicator

Name

U.S.

Canada

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

Brake System
Indicator
(Red)

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is
low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
brake system.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with a
system related to braking other than the
conventional brake system.
Comes on if there is a problem with an
automatic brake hold system.

●

2 What to do when the indicator comes on while
driving P. 467
●

Canada

●

Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)

●

(Amber)

Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
P. 467

(Red)
U.S.

Comes on while driving - Check the brake fluid
level.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

75 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

U.S.

Canada

●

Electric Parking
Brake System
Indicator

●

Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off if the parking brake has been
released.
Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on for about 15 seconds when
you pull the electric parking brake switch
while the ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1.
Stays on for about 15 seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1
while the electric parking brake is set.

●

Blinks and the electric parking brake system
indicator comes on at the same time - There is a
problem with the electric parking brake system. The
parking brake may not be set.

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
electric parking brake system.

●

Comes on while driving - Avoid using the parking
brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on when the automatic brake
hold system is on.

Instrument Panel

●

Electric Parking
Brake Indicator

Explanation

2 If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator
Comes On P. 468

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 380

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

76 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

U.S.

Instrument Panel

Canada

On/Blinking
●

Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator

●

Continuously
variable
transmission
models

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on when the automatic brake
hold is activated.

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 380

●

Comes on while driving - Press the electric
parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
2 Parking Brake P. 377

Electric Parking Brake System

Brake Depressing
Indicator
Manual
transmission
models

Explanation

Comes on when the electric parking
brake switch is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while the
electric parking brake is in operation.

Automatic Brake Hold System
●

●

Comes on when the automatic brake
hold button is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while the
automatic brake hold is in operation.
Blinks if the automatic brake hold is
automatically canceled while it is in
operation. The beeper sounds.

●

Comes on while driving - Press the automatic
brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 380

●

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

77 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

●

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●

●

Charging System
Indicator

Shift Lever Position
Indicator *

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when
the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure
is low.

●

Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a
safe place.

Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, and goes off either
when the engine starts or after several
seconds if the engine did not start. If
“readiness codes” have not been set, it
blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s
cylinders is detected.

●

Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics
for the emissions control systems.

●

Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where
there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for
10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when
the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not
charging.

●

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
P. 465

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 485

●

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks P. 466

Comes on while driving - Turn off the heating
and cooling system */climate control system * and
rear defogger in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 465

Indicates the current shift lever position.
2 Shifting P. 348, 350

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

78 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
Transmission
Indicator *

Instrument Panel

M (7-speed manual
shift mode)
Indicator/Shift
Indicator *

On/Blinking
●

Blinks if the transmission system has a
problem.

●

Comes on when 7-speed manual shift
mode is applied.

●

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
●

●

Low Fuel Indicator
●

Explanation
●

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and
acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a
dealer immediately.

2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 352

Comes on and the beeper sounds if you
are not wearing a seat belt when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not wearing a
seat belt, the indicator comes on a few
seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the
front passenger has not fastened a seat
belt. The beeper sounds and the
indicator blinks at regular intervals.

●

Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 1.98 U.S.
gal./7.5 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel
gauge.

●

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when
you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has
fastened the seat belt - A detection error may
have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 36

●

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

79 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator

●

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

●

High Temperature
Indicator
(Red)

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is
a problem with the ABS.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the
following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Blinks when the engine coolant
temperature goes up, and stays on if the
temperature continues to rise.

●

Goes off, then comes on in blue when the engine
coolant temperature is low.
Blinks while driving - Drive slowly to prevent
overheating.
Stays on while driving - Immediately stop in a
safe place and allow the engine to cool.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 383

●

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 Overheating P. 463

Low Temperature
Indicator
(Blue)

●

Comes on while the engine coolant
temperature is low, then goes off once
the engine reaches normal operating
temperature.

●

If the indicator stays on after the engine has reached
normal operating temperature, there may be a
problem with the temperature sensors. Have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

80 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator

Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator

●
●

●

Door and Tailgate
Open Indicator

●

Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
VSA® system or hill start assist system.

Explanation
●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System P. 368

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 369

Comes on for a few seconds if you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on if any door or the tailgate is
not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if any door or the tailgate is
opened while driving.

●

Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.

Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when
the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
EPS system.

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On P. 467

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

81 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Blinks for about one minute, and then
stays on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.

●

Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a
compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or
replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as
you can.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you
set the power mode to ON, then goes
off.
Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the smart entry system or
push button starting system.

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator

Smart Entry System
Indicator *

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,
check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if
necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the
recommended pressures - The system needs to be
calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 373

Instrument Panel

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
May come on briefly if the ignition switch
is turned to ON (w *1 and the vehicle is
not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate
the calibration process is not yet
complete.
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.

●

U.S.
models
only

Explanation

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

82 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

U.S.

Instrument Panel

Canada

On/Blinking
●

Starter System
Indicator *

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

●

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator *

* Not available on all models

Comes on for a few seconds when you
set the power mode to ON, then goes off
when the engine starts.
Comes on if the starter system has a
problem.

●

As a temporary measure, press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds
while pressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal
(manual transmission only), and manually start the
engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Blinks when you operate the turn signal
lever.
Blink if you press the hazard warning
button.

●

Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal
light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 412, 415

Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.

●

Comes on whenever the light switch is
on, or in AUTO * when the exterior lights
are on.

●

Comes on when the fog lights are on.

Lights On Indicator

Explanation

—
●

If you remove the key from the ignition switch *, or
set the power mode * to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while
the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
—

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

83 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Blinks Models without smart entry system

You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0 , pull the key out, and then insert
the key and turn it to ON (w again.
Models with smart entry system

Immobilizer System
Indicator
●

●

ECON Mode
Indicator *

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on when you press the ECON
button.

You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode
again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other
devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Instrument Panel

Comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key information.

Explanation

2 ECON Button * P. 357

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

84 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Security System
Alarm Indicator

Explanation

Blinks when the security system alarm
has been set.

2 Security System Alarm P. 118

Indicator
Instrument Panel

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator

●

Comes on when you press the CRUISE
button.

2 Cruise Control P. 358

CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator

●

Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control.

2 Cruise Control P. 358

Washer Level
Indicator *

●

Maintenance
Minder Indicator

●

Comes on when the scheduled
maintenance is due soon.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
AWD.
Blinks when the AWD system is
overheated. The system is inactive.

All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) System
Indicator *

●

Comes on when the washer fluid gets
low.

●

Refill washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 410

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 395
●

●

Stays on constantly - the engine drives only the
front wheels in this state. Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - the engine drives only the
front wheels in this state. Stop in a safe place, shift
to (P , and idle the engine until the indicator goes
off. If the indicator does not stop blinking, take your
vehicle to a dealer.
2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
SystemTM * P. 372

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

85 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Forward
Collision
Warning
(FCW)
Indicator *

●

Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the FCW system.
Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.

●

Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Blinks when the system detects
a likely collision with a vehicle in
front of you. The beeper
sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to
prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).

Comes on when the FCW
system shuts itself off.

●

Message

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

—

Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW
system is too high. The system activates when the
temperature inside the system cools down.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 363

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked
by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place,
and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after you
cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 363

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

86 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

●

Lane
Departure
Warning
(LDW)
Indicator *

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the LDW system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.

Blinks when your vehicle is too
close to the lane lines. The
beeper sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to
keep your vehicle within the lane lines.

Comes on when the LDW
system shuts itself off.

●

Stays on - The temperature inside the LDW
camera is too high.
The system activates when the temperature inside
the camera cools down.
2 LDW Camera P. 366

●

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message

—

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

87 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message

Condition
●

Explanation

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2 Check Fuel Cap Message P. 466

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.

Continued

Instrument Panel

●

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

88 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition
●

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in (P .

Canadian models with continuously variable transmission
●

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P .

Instrument Panel

U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
●

●

Move the shift lever to (P .

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—

U.S. models with manual transmission
Canadian models

Explanation

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the
same time.

●

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

●

Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.

●

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote
back inside the vehicle and close the door.

●

Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery
becomes weak.

●

Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 435

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

89 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Models with FCW

Message

Condition
●

Explanation

Appears when the warning distance setting has
been changed.
Instrument Panel

2 To change vehicle distance and to turn the
system on and off P. 363

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

90 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer and related indicators. They are
displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph and km/h.
Instrument Panel

■ Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

91 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

Information Display

1Switching the Display

The information display shows the fuel gauge, odometer, trip meter, engine oil life
and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

■ Switching the Display

Models with display audio system

Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the audio/information screen. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.

Select/Reset Knob

Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Odometer
Trip Meter A
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge

Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Range
Trip Meter A
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge

Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Average Fuel Economy A
Trip Meter A
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge
Continued

Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Average Fuel Economy B
Trip Meter B
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge

Instrument Panel

Press the
(select/reset) knob to change the display.
Each time you press the
(select/reset) knob, the information display changes as follows:

Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Engine Oil Life
Fuel Gauge

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

92 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

■ Odometer
Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.

■ Trip Meter

1Trip Meter

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. TRIP A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

knob. The trip meter is

■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.

■ Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

93 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

■ Outside Temperature

1Outside Temperature

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
When the engine oil life is shown on the information
display, you cannot adjust the outside temperature.
Push the
knob to select the other display.

Instrument Panel

■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press and hold the
(Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display.
u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the
knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
u The adjustment is complete.

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

■ Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 395

■ Fuel Gauge

1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

94 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

■ Changing Ring Color
Select/Reset Knob

Instrument Panel

The center ring illumination can be changed to a color of your choice. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1 position and with the meter
ring illuminated, press the select/reset knob. Each time the knob is pressed, the
colors change in the following order:
White  Blue  Purple  Pink  Red  Amber  Yellow

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

95 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock.................................................................... 96
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions................................... 98
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength * ...... 100
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ... 101
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside.. 107
Childproof Door Locks.................................... 110
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking......................... 111
Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Setting ......................................................... 112
Opening and Closing the Tailgate .................. 115
Using the Tailgate Release Button................... 116
Security System
Immobilizer System......................................... 118
Security System Alarm .................................... 118
Opening and Closing the Windows................ 121
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * ............. 123

* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the Steering
Wheel
Models without smart entry system
Ignition Switch.......................................... 124
Models with smart entry system
ENGINE START/STOP Button ..................... 125
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison ...128
Turn Signals.............................................. 129
Light Switches .......................................... 129
Fog Lights * ............................................... 132
Daytime Running Lights ............................ 133
Wipers and Washers ................................. 134
Brightness Control .................................... 136
Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*/Heated Windshield* ...137
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ................... 139

Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror.................................. 140
Power Door Mirrors........................................ 141
Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats ..................................................... 142
Head Restraints .............................................. 144
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position................... 147
Rear Seats ...................................................... 148
Armrest.......................................................... 151
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights ................................................. 152
Interior Convenience Items ............................. 154
Heating and Cooling System *
Using Vents, Heating and A/C ........................ 163
Climate Control System *
Using Automatic Climate Control ................... 167
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ................ 175

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

96 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Clock
Adjusting the Clock
1Adjusting the Time

Models without navigation system

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Adjusting the Time

The clock in the information display is automatically
adjusted along with the audio system’s clock display.
Models with navigation system

■ Display audio system *

Controls

1. Select the
(HOME) icon, then select
Settings.
2. Select System, Clock, then Clock
Adjustment.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
3/4.
4. Select OK to set the time.

The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
Models without navigation system

You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 252
1Display audio system *
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 252

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

97 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

■ Color audio system *

1Color audio system *

1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.
u Adjust Clock is selected.
2. Rotate
to change hour, then press .
3. Rotate
to change minute, then press
.
4. To enter the selection, rotate
and select
Set, then press .

These indications are used to show how to operate
the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
You can also select Adjust Clock by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate
to select Adjust Clock, then press
.
Controls

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

98 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:

■ Keys
Models with smart entry system

Smart
Entry
Remote *

Controls

Use the smart entry remote to start and stop
the engine, and to lock and unlock all the
doors and tailgate. You can also use the smart
entry system to lock and unlock the doors and
tailgate.
Models without smart entry system

Ignition Key
with Remote
Transmitter *

* Not available on all models

Use the key to start and stop the engine, and
to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate.
You can also use the remote transmitter to
lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.

1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 118
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter/smart entry
system * may not work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

99 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

■ Smart entry remote *
Release Knob

Built-in Key

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.

■ Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.

Controls

To remove the built-in key, slide the release
knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
smart entry remote until it clicks.

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

100 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the
engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
Controls

100

* Not available on all models

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

101 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate.
You can lock/unlock the doors and the
tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80
cm) of the outside door or tailgate outer
handle.

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,

•

Door Lock
Button

■ Locking the doors and tailgate
Press the door lock button on the front door
or the tailgate.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock;
and the security system sets.

•
•

•

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low. Replace the
button battery as soon as possible.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 435

Lock Button

* Not available on all models

Controls

•

you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate
while someone else with the remote is within
range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
After locking the door, wait at least two seconds
before unlocking it by gripping the handle.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the smart entry remote if it is above or
below the outside handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.

Continued

101

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

102 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate

Controls

Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors and the tailgate unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate release button:
u The tailgate unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
2 Using the Tailgate Release Button
P. 116
Tailgate Release
Button

102

* Not available on all models

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30
seconds of unlocking the vehicle, the doors will
automatically relock.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

103 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Remote Transmitter
Unlock Button
Lock Button
LED

Unlock Button

■ Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
and tailgate lock, and the security system
sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u A beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote transmitter: The
lights go off immediately.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.

Lock Button

Controls

LED

1Using the Remote Transmitter

The remote transmitter will not lock the vehicle when
a door is open.
Models without smart entry system

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

Continued

103

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

104 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.
Twice:
u The remaining doors and the tailgate unlock.

Controls

104

1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low. Replace the
button battery as soon as possible.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 435

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

105 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

If the lock or unlock button of the remote
does not work, use the key instead.
Fully insert the key and turn it.

Lock

If you unlock the doors with the key, the alarm
activates when you open the hood or move the shift
lever out of (P (continuously variable transmission
models).

Unlock

Continued

Controls

When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
remaining doors and the tailgate.

105

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

106 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
■ Locking the driver’s door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.

■ Locking the passengers’ doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
Controls

■ Lockout prevention system
Models without smart entry system

The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch,
and any door or the tailgate is open.
Models with smart entry system

The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside
the vehicle.

106

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
and tailgate lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand when you
lock the driver’s door, any of the other doors or the
tailgate, otherwise you may end up locking the key
inside the vehicle.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

107 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Using the Lock Tab
To Lock

To Unlock

Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all of the other doors and the tailgate
lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.

■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.

■ Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.

Controls

Continued

107

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

108 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.

Inner Handle
Controls

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to unlock
all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the master
door lock switch.
2 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking P. 111

108

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However, this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 110

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

109 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all the doors and the tailgate.

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver’s door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors and the
tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.

To Lock

Master Door
Lock Switch

Controls

To Unlock

109

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

110 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.

■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
Unlock
Controls

110

■ When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.

Lock

1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

111 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.

■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
switch.
2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting P. 112

■ Auto Door Unlocking

Controls

■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

111

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

112 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
■ Auto door locking
Mode

Description

Drive Lock Mode*1

All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Off

The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

Controls

■ Auto door unlocking
Mode
Driver’s Door Open
Mode*1
Continuously variable
transmission models

Description
All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

All doors unlock when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Park Unlock Mode
Off
*1:Default setting

112

The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

113 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps

Drive Lock Mode*1

Apply the parking brake.

The driver’s door must be closed at this stage.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal*3.

Off

Open the driver’s door.

Controls

Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed.
Release the switch.

Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the brake pedal*3.
u Customization is completed.
u All doors unlock and all turn signals blink three times.

*1 : Default setting
*2 : Models without smart entry system
*3 : Models with smart entry system

Continued

113

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

114 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Steps

Driver Door Open Unlock Mode*1

Continuously variable transmission models

Park Unlock Mode

Apply the parking brake.
1

Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever out of (P with the
brake pedal depressed.

Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P .

Controls

The driver’s door must be closed at this stage.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal*3.

Off
Apply the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (P .
Open the driver’s door.

Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed.
Release the switch.

Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the brake pedal*3.
u Customization is completed.
u All doors lock and all turn signals blink three times.

*1 : Default setting
*2 : Models without smart entry system
*3 : Models with smart entry system

114

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

115 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.

■ Opening the tailgate
• Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
• Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.

3 WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate
that is being opened or closed can be
seriously injured.
Make sure that all people are clear of the
tailgate before opening or closing it.
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to
put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo
area when closing the tailgate.

Controls

■ Closing the tailgate
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 70
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the
cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in
front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.

115

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

116 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Button

Using the Tailgate Release Button

Tailgate
Release
Button

Controls

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.
Inner
Handle

116

When all the doors are unlocked or press the
tailgate unlock button on the remote
transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the
tailgate release button and lift open the
tailgate.

If you close the tailgate when all the doors are
locked, the tailgate locks automatically.
u Some exterior lights flash.

1Using the Tailgate Release Button
Models with smart entry system

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can unlock the tailgate while someone else
with the remote is within range.
• Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper
sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.
If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you do not
have to unlock the tailgate before opening it.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

117 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Button

■ Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the
tailgate.

If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using
the remote transmitter, or smart entry remote, when
closing, the tailgate locks automatically.

Controls

Tailgate
Unlock
Button

1Using the Remote Transmitter

Tailgate
Unlock
Button

117

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

118 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.

Controls

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition
switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and
audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.

1Immobilizer System
NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.

Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.
However, the alarm goes off if a door is opened with the key and then the shift lever
is moved out of (P (continuously variable transmission models) or the hood is
opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.

■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

118

1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

119 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or smart entry remote, or turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is
deactivated.

■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.

Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the hood with the hood release handle.
Continuously variable transmission models

• Moving the shift lever out of (P .
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may activate
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter,
or smart entry system.

Controls

■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood is closed.
• All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote
transmitter, or smart entry system.

1Security System Alarm

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.

■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system, or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. The
security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

119

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

120 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
Controls

Panic Button

■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

120

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

121 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to
open and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver’s seat.

■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
Driver’s
Window
Switch

On
Off

Indicator
Power Window Lock Button

■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.

3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0 *1. Opening either front door cancels this function.

Controls

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a
child is in the vehicle.

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

121

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

122 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close
Function

To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Close
Open
Controls

122

Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

123 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Opening and Closing the Moonroof *
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
Open
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Tilt

■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.

* Not available on all models

3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

Controls

The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.

123

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

124 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Models without smart entry system

Ignition Switch

1Ignition Switch
Manual transmission models

3 WARNING
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.

Controls

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
the key.

Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.
Continuously variable transmission models

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .
All models

If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.

124

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

125 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

Models with smart entry system

ENGINE START/STOP Button

1ENGINE START/STOP Button

■ Changing the Power Mode
Continuously Variable Transmission
Indicator

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
Operating Range
Manual Transmission
Indicator

You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.The engine may also run
if the smart entry remote is close to the door or
window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.

ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting
low, the engine may not start when you push the
ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not
start, refer to the following link.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 458

ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can
be used.
Without depressing
the clutch pedal

Without depressing
the brake pedal

Controls

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked.*1
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.

Press the button without the shift lever in (P .

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

Shift to (P then press the button.

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.

Press the button.
U.S. models Shift to (P .
*1 : Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

Continued

125

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

126 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

■ Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

Controls

When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).

*1: Continuously variable transmission models

126

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

127 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.

■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder

■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the information display notifies the driver
inside that the remote outside of the vehicle.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.

When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.

Controls

Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.

127

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

128 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position

Without Smart
Entry System

LOCK (0
(with/without
the key)
●

●

Controls

●

Power Mode

Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical components
can be used.

VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)

ACCESSORY (q

●
●

Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.

ACCESSORY

ON (w

●

Normal key position
while driving.
All electrical components
can be used.

Indicator is:

With Smart Entry
System and
ENGINE START/
STOP Button

Indicator-Off
Indicator-On or blinking
● Engine is turned off and
● Engine is turned off.
● Some electrical
power is shut down.
● The steering wheel is
components such as the
locked.*1
audio system and the
● No electrical components
accessory power socket
can be used.
can be operated.

*1 : Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

128

START (e

●

Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to ON (w when
you release the key.

START

Off

IndicatorIndicator-Off
● The mode automatically
On (engine is turned off)
returns to ON after the
Off (engine is running)
● All electrical components
engine starts.
can be used.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

129 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.

Right Turn

■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.

Left Turn

1Light Switches

Light Switches

Models without smart entry system

■ Manual Operation
High Beams

Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights

Controls

This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch*1.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.

Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
Models with smart entry system

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 82
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

129

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

130 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.

The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.

Controls

Light Sensor

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

130

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

131 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Headlight Integration with Wipers *
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a number of certain intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in
the AUTO position).

This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
Controls

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
take the remote with you, and close the driver's door.

1Headlight Integration with Wipers *

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

131

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

132 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *

Fog Lights *
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch
Controls

132

* Not available on all models

1Fog Lights *
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 82

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

133 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights

Daytime Running Lights
The headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions
have been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
• The headlight switch is off, or in
.
• The parking brake is released.

1Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights come on dimmer when
the headlight switch is in
than when it is in
AUTO *. In AUTO *, if the ambient brightness is dark,
the low beam headlights come on.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running
lights.
Controls

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the head light switch is in AUTO * and it is getting darker outside.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

133

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

134 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
1Wipers and Washers

■ Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ MIST
Pull to
use
washer.

The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.

Controls

■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring *

Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.

■ Adjusting wiper operation *
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

134

* Not available on all models

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Models with adjustment ring

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation's
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting
become the same.
All models

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

135 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

■ Rear Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.

INT: Intermittent

)
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then
remove the obstacle.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload.
Wiper operation will return to normal within a few
minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

Controls

■ Washer (

If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.

OFF
Washer

Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.

■ Operating in reverse
When you shift the transmission to (R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
Front Wiper Position

Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent)

Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe)

Continuous

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

135

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

136 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
When the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you
can use the
(select/reset) knob to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

(Select/Reset) Knob
Controls

You will hear a beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after you have adjusted the
brightness, you will be returned to the
previous screen.

■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

136

1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
exterior lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

137 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror */Heated Windshield *

Defogger/Heated Door Mirror */Heated Windshield *
■ Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
Models with heating and cooling system

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button

Press the rear defogger button or touch the
icon to defog the rear window and mirrors
when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.

Models with climate control system

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.

Controls

Models with climate control system

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

137

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

138 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror */Heated Windshield *

Canadian models

1Heated Windshield Button

■ Heated Windshield Button
Press the heated windshield button to deice
the windshield when the ignition switch is
turned to ON (w *1.
The heated windshield automatically switch
off after 15 minutes.
Controls
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

138

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged or deiced.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

139 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Controls

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
To adjust
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
To lock
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
Lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

139

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

140 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.

■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab

Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Front Seats P. 142

Controls

Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When you are driving after dark, the
automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
the glare from headlights behind you. Press
the AUTO button to turn this function on and
off. When activated, the AUTO indicator
comes on.
Indicator

140

1Adjusting the Mirrors

Sensor
Auto Button

* Not available on all models

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

141 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors
Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Controls

■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

141

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

142 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats
Allow sufficient
space.

Move back.
Controls

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.

■ Adjusting the Front Seat

1Adjusting the Seats

3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.
1Adjusting the Front Seat
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Horizontal Position
Adjustment

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.

Pull up the lever to change the
angle.

Driver’s seat is shown.

142

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

143 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.

Controls

The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

3 WARNING

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

143

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

144 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

■ Adjusting the Head Restraints

Controls

Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.

■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.

144

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

145 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

■ Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions
Outer

Center

Continued

Controls

A passenger sitting in a back seating position
should adjust the height of their head restraint
to an appropriate position before the vehicle
begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.

145

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

146 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.

Controls

146

To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
To remove and install the rear outer head restraint,
recline the seat-back slightly forward as the space
between the ceiling and the seat-back is limited.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

147 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.

3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
Controls

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

147

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

148 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats
■ Adjusting the Rear Seat-Backs
Pull the lever on the right to change the angle
of the right half of the seat-back, and left for
the left half.

Controls

148

Release Lever

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

149 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

■ Folding Down the Rear Seats

1Folding Down the Rear Seats

The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space.

Anchor
Buckle

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and
floor before you fold down the rear seat.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.

2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 41
Latch Plate

3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
4. Pull the release lever and fold down the
seat-back.

Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat
cushion are securely latched back into place before
driving. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center
shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot.

To return the seat to the original position, pull
up the seat-back in the upright position.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 55

Controls

■ To fold down the seat
1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the
latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the
ceiling.

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending to the rear seats are properly
secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have
to brake hard.

Release Lever

Continued

149

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

150 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

■ Folding the Rear Seat Up

1Folding the Rear Seat Up

Separately lift up the left and right halves of
the rear seat cushions to make room for cargo
area.

Loop

■ Lifting up the seat cushion
1. Make sure the seat belt buckles are in their
loops on the seat.
Controls

2. Pull up the rear seat cushion.
3. Fold the seat leg down while pushing the
seat cushion firmly against the seat-back to
lock it.

Seat Leg
Seat Leg

Latch

Floor Guide

150

■ Putting the seat in the original position
1. Hold the seat cushion in the upright
position, and pull up the seat leg fully.
u The seat cushion can abruptly fall down
once you pull up the seat leg.
2. Slowly put down the seat cushion and set
the seat leg in the floor guide.
u A latch comes out when the leg is set
properly.

After you fold the seat up, or put it back in the
original position, make sure the seat is firmly secured
by rocking it forward and back.
Check if there are any items on the seat before you
pull the seat cushion up. Check if there are any
obstacles around the floor guide before you put the
seat back in the original position.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

151 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest
■ Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust:
Slide the armrest to the desired position.

Controls

■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest *
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.

* Not available on all models

151

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

152 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

■ ON

Front *

Off

Controls

Door Activated Position

The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.
Models without smart entry system

Rear
Door Activated Position
On
Off

• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
Models without smart entry system

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.

• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).

The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver’s door.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

■ OFF

• When you close the driver’s door with the key in

Models with smart entry system

The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.

Models without smart entry system

the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition
switch, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE
START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

152

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

153 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

■ Map Lights
Models with moonroof

1Map Lights

The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.

Models with moonroof

When the front interior light switch is in the door
activated position and any door is open, the map
light will not go off when you press the lens.

Controls

Models without moonroof

■ Cargo Area Light

Off

■ ON
The light comes on when you open the
tailgate, and goes off when closed.
■ OFF
The light stays off with or without opening the
tailgate.

153

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

154 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items
■ Glove Box

1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.

Controls

■ Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.

154

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

155 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders
NOTICE

■ Front seat beverage holders

Front Door

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

■ Center console beverage holders
To put a short-size beverage: Push down
the bottom plate.

Center Console

Bottom plate

To put a tall-size beverage: Pull up the
bottom plate.

Continued

155

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

156 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Rear Door

Controls

156

At the Back of the Center Console

■ Rear seat beverage holders

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

157 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Cargo Floor Box
Pull up the cargo area floor lid.

2WD models

Controls

Cargo Floor Box
AWD models

Cargo Floor Box

Continued

157

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

158 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

The accessory power socket can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w *1.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
Each accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.

Controls

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.

Cover

■ Accessory power socket (rearward of
center console)
Open the cover to use it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

158

When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

159 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Canadian models

■ Accessory power socket (cargo area)
Open the cover to use it.

1Coat Hook

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.

Continued

Controls

■ Coat Hook

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.

159

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

160 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Tie-down Anchors
The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor
can be used to install a net for securing items.

Front Anchors

Controls

160

Rear Anchors

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

161 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Canadian models

1Cargo Cover

■ Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used to conceal your
items and protect them from direct sunlight.

■ To remove:
Pull out the cargo cover rearwards and
remove it.

The cargo cover is collapsible.
1. Take the opposite sides, fold the cover
halfway, then twist into opposite ways.
2. Curl to narrow the cover as shown.

Continued

Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat
in the cargo area. They could block your view and be
thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.
To prevent cargo cover damage, do not:
• Place items on the cargo cover.
• Put weight on the cargo cover.
When reinstalling the cargo cover, put the tagged
side first.

Controls

■ To fold:

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area
while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have
to brake hard.

Tag

161

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

162 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Seat Heaters *

1Seat Heaters *

The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use
the seat heaters.

3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.

Controls

Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Touch the seat heater icon.
Once - The HI setting (two indicators on)
Twice - The LO setting
Three times - The OFF setting (no indicator on)

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

162

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

163 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Heating and Cooling System *
Using Vents, Heating and A/C

Dashboard
vents

Dashboard
and floor
vents

Floor vents

Floor and
defroster
vents

Defroster
vents

Mode Control Dial

Adjusts the fan speed. Rotate the dial all
the way to OFF to turn everything off.

Changes airflow.

Controls

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial
Adjusts the interior temperature.

A/C Button
Press to cool the interior or dehumidify
while heating.

(Recirculation) Button
Press the
button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in
normal situations.

* Not available on all models

Continued

163

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

164 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C

■ Passenger Side Vents
Three separate front passenger side air vents allow for different air flow rates
through the vehicle. Passengers can separately:
• Adjust each vent to optimize airflow
Adjust from side to side or up and
throughout the vehicle.
down

Controls

Mid

Low

High

• Close individual vents to adjust passenger
comfort levels.

164

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

165 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C

■ Heating

1Heating

The heater uses heat from the engine coolant
to warm the air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
.
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.

1To rapidly warm up the interior

Controls

■ To rapidly warm up the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select
.
3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
4. Press the
button (the indicator on).

When you select
, the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.

Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.

■ To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.

Continued

165

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

166 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C

■ Cooling

1To rapidly cool down the interior

1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
.
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the A/C button (indicator on).

Models with ECON button

While in ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.

Controls

■ To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the
button (the indicator on).

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Selecting
turns the air conditioning
system on and automatically switches the
system to fresh air mode.

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select
.
3. Press the
button.
4. Set the temperature to maximum warm.

166

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

167 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Climate Control System *
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Models without SYNC icon

Temperature Control
Icons

Dashboard
and floor
vents

If any icons are selected while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the icon that
was selected will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the icon that was selected will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO icon
is selected.

Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
Mode Control Icon
Fan Control Icons

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

Controls

Dashboard
vents

1Using Automatic Climate Control

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
You can raise or lower the temperature or fan speed
setting flicking either control icon.
AUTO Icon
(On/Off) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon

(Fresh Air) Icon
(Recirculation) Icon

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Select the AUTO icon.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control icons.
3. Select the
icon to cancel.
* Not available on all models

Continued

167

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

168 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Models with SYNC icon

1Using Automatic Climate Control
Selecting the
icon switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.

Dashboard
vents

Controls

Driver Side
Temperature Control
Icons

Dashboard
and floor
vents

The climate control system is voice operable. See the
navigation system manual.

Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents

Models with ECON button

While in ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.

Mode Control Icon
Passenger Side
Temperature
Control Icons

AUTO Icon
(On/Off) Icon
SYNC Icon

(Recirculation) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Select the AUTO icon.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver side temperature control icons.
3. Select the
icon to cancel.

168

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

169 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Models without SYNC icon

Select the
(recirculation) or
(fresh air) icon to switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Models with SYNC icon

Continued

Controls

Select the
(recirculation) icon to switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.

169

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

170 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Models without SYNC icon

Select the
icon to turn the air conditioning
system on and automatically switch the
system to fresh air mode.
Select the
icon again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.

Controls

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

Models with SYNC icon

170

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

171 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Models without SYNC icon

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Select the
icon.
2. Select the
icon.

1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

Controls

Models with SYNC icon

Continued

171

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

172 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Turning On and Off the Touch Screen Beep

Controls

You hear the beep when operating the climate control system on the touch screen.
This can be turned on and off.
To turn off the beep:
Models without SYNC icon
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Touch the
of the temperature control
icon five times while pressing and holding
the
.
3. Release the
, after -- blinks five times
and OF is displayed.

Models with SYNC icon

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

172

1Turning On and Off the Touch Screen Beep
If you touch any other icons during this procedure,
the setting may fail. In this case, once you turn the
ignition switch to OFF (0 *1, then follow this
procedure again.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

173 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Models without SYNC icon

To turn on the beep:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Touch the
of the temperature control
icon five times while pressing and holding
the
.
3. Release the
, after OF blinks five times
and -- is displayed.

Controls

Models with SYNC icon

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

173

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

174 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Synchronization Mode *

Controls

Driver Side
Temperature
Control Icon

1Synchronization Mode *
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.

Passenger Side
Temperature
Control Icon

SYNC Icon

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronization mode.
1. Select the SYNC icon.
u The system switches to synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control icon.
Select the SYNC icon to return to dual mode.

174

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

175 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors
Sensor

The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.

Controls

Sensor

175

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

176

176 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

177 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System
About Your Audio System.................... 178
USB Port(s) ........................................... 179
HDMI® Port * ........................................ 180
Auxiliary Input Jack *............................. 180
Audio System Theft Protection ............. 181
Audio Remote Controls........................ 182
Models with color audio system

Audio System Basic Operation............. 184
Audio/Information Screen .................... 185
Adjusting the Sound ............................ 189
Display Setup ....................................... 190
Playing AM/FM Radio ........................... 191
Playing a CD ........................................ 193
Playing an iPod..................................... 196

* Not available on all models

Playing a USB Flash Drive ..................... 199
Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 202
Models with display audio system

Audio System Basic Operation ............ 205
Audio/Information Screen .................... 206
Adjusting the Sound ............................ 211
Display Setup ....................................... 212
Playing AM/FM Radio........................... 213
Playing a CD ........................................ 216
Playing an iPod .................................... 219
Playing Internet Radio .......................... 222
Playing a USB Flash Drive ..................... 224
Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 227
Playing a Video Using the HDMI® ......... 229
Smartphone Apps ................................ 231

Siri® Eyes Free.......................................232
Audio Error Messages ...........................233

General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 237
Customized Features.............................252
Models with color audio system

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................274
Models with display audio system

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................297

177

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

178 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC
files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface *.

Features

iPod
Remote Controls

HDMI® Port*1
Auxiliary Input Jack*2

*1:Models with display audio system
*2:Models with color audio system

178

* Not available on all models

HDMI®*1
USB Port*1

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

USB
Flash
Drive

USB Port*1, *2

1About Your Audio System

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

179 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

USB Port(s)
1. Open the cover.
2. Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.

1USB Port(s)

• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
•
•

USB Port

•
•

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.

Features

•

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend your data backed up before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.

179

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

180 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio SystemuHDMI® Port *

HDMI® Port *
1. Open the cover.
2. Install the HDMI® cable to the HDMI® port.

1HDMI® Port *

• Do not leave the HDMI® connected device in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
• We recommend your data backed up before using
the device in your vehicle.
• Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.

HDMI Port

Features

Auxiliary Input Jack *
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.

180

* Not available on all models

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
1Auxiliary Input Jack *
To switch mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to AUX mode by pressing
the CD/AUX button.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

181 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a cord entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
Features

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

181

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

182 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
Button
FMAMCDUSBiPod
Button
Bluetooth® AudioPandora® *AhaTM*
Apps *, *1AUX */AUX HDMI® *
Button

SOURCE
Button

(Menu)
Button *

Press
Press

(Volume) Buttons
: To increase the volume.
: To decrease the volume.

Features

Button
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong radio station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong radio station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD or USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Internet radio *
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.
*1: Appears only when connected to HondaLink®.

182

* Not available on all models

1Audio Remote Controls
Some mode appear only when an appropriate device
or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be operated.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

183 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Models with display audio system

* Not available on all models

1Audio Remote Controls
The
button is available only when the audio
mode is FM, AM, CD, USB, iPod, Pandora® *, AhaTM*,
or Bluetooth® Audio.

Features

Steering Wheel
(Menu) Button
• When listening to the radio
Press
: To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, or
Seek.
• When listening to a CD or USB flash drive
Press
: To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Repeat, or Random.
• When listening to an iPod
Press
: To display the menu items. You can select Repeat or Shuffle.
• When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio
Press
: To display the menu items. You can select Pause or Play.
• When listening to a Pandora® *
Press
: To display the menu items. You can select Bookmark, or Play/Pause.

183

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

184 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with color audio system

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w .
Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK
(Sound)
(Day/Night)
button to access some audio functions.
Button
Button

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press

Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

(Back)
Button
Features

184

MENU/
CLOCK
Button
Selector Knob

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press
to set
your selection.
MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any
mode.
The available mode includes the wallpaper,
display, clock, language setup, and play
modes. Play modes can be also selected from
scan, random, repeat, and so on.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.
(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press
, then adjust the brightness using
.
u Each time you press
, the mode switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.

to select.
to enter.

Menu Items
2 Adjust Clock P. 97
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 187
2 Display Setup P. 190
2 Scan P. 192, 195, 201
2 Play Mode P. 195, 198, 201
2 RDS Settings P. 192
2 Bluetooth P. 256, 280
Press the SOURCE,
,
,
or
button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 182
One of the operating system used in this unit is eCos.
For software license terms and conditions, visit their
website (eCos license URL: http://
ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html)
For source code disclosure and other details
regarding eCos, visit: http://
www.hondaopensource2.com

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

185 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display

Audio/Information Screen

Audio
Features

Clock/Wallpaper

Continued

185

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

186 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

■ Change display
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio display, select Audio.
Features

186

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

187 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port(s) P. 179

Continued

•
•

Features

2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
3. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select Import, then press .
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Rotate
to select a desired picture, then
press .
u The selected picture is displayed.
7. Press
to save the picture.
8. Press
to select OK.
9. Rotate
to select a location to save the
picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.

in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No compatible images were found. See
Owner’s Manual. message appears.

187

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

188 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Select, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper, then press

1Wallpaper Setup
To go back to the previous screen, press the
(Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

■ To view wallpaper once it is set

Features

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

188

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

189 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
(sound) Button

Press the
(sound) button, and rotate
to scroll through the following choices:

1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

LIST/SELECT (Selector) Knob
TRE is selectable.

Bass

TRE

Treble

FAD

Fader

BAL

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

Features

BAS

Rotate
to adjust the sound setting, then
press .

189

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

190 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

Features

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Display Adjustment,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate
to adjust the setting, then press
.

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Color Theme, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

190

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

191 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

RADIO Button
Press to select a band.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to search up and down
the selected band for a station with a strong
signal.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.

Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Features

VOL/
(Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

Continued

191

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

192 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing AM/FM Radio

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select the station, then press

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 182

■ Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Update List, then press

Features

■ Radio text

1Radio Data System (RDS)

Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select RDS Settings, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press

192

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

193 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA,
or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD/AUX button.

Audio/Information Screen
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Features

CD/AUX Button
Press to play a CD.
VOL/
(Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly within a
track/file.
Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.

Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/files. Press
to display a track/folder list.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

193

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

194 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD
NOTICE

1. Press

to switch the display to a folder list.

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

Features

Folder
Selection

to select a folder.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

Track
Selection

194

2. Rotate

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.

3. Press
to display a list of tracks in that
folder.
4. Rotate
to select a track, then press .

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

195 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

Press the selected button.

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC):
Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current
track/file.
Random
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays
all files in the current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides
10-second sampling of the first file in each of the
main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in
MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Features

■ To turn off a play mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
.
Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
To turn it off, rotate
to select Normal Play, then
press
.

195

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

196 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then press the CD/
AUX button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 179

USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.

Features

CD/AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
VOL/
(Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.

Album Art
Play Mode Buttons
Press to select a play mode.

196

Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

197 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the
Selector Knob

1. Press

to display the iPod music list.

1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234

Item
Selection

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Features

Category
Selection

3. Press
to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
u Press
and rotate
repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.

Continued

197

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

198 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons
Features

198

■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in
a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a
selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current
song.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
.
Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
To turn it off, rotate
to select Normal Play, then
press
.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

199 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the CD/AUX button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 179

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

CD/AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
VOL/
(Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

199

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

200 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press

to display a folder list.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 237
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.

Folder
Selection

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

Features
Track
Selection

200

3. Press
to display a list of files in that
folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

201 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the
current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling
of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all files in the current folder.

Features

■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.

1How to Select a Play Mode

201

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

202 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 280
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

CD/AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.

Audio/Information Screen

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.

Features

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

VOL/
(Volume/
Power) Knob
Press to turn
the audio
system on and
off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.

Pause Button (Preset 2)
Press to pause playing a
file.
Play Button (Preset 1)
Press to resume playing a file.
/

Press

202

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

(Seek/Skip) Buttons
or
to change files.

MENU/CLOCK
Button
Press to display
the menu
items.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

203 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
CD/AUX Button

Pause Button
Play Button

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the CD/AUX button until the
Bluetooth Audio Source is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack or USB port, you may need to press the CD/AUX
button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio
system.

■ To pause or resume a file
Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode.

Continued

Features

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

203

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

204 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the
Selector Knob

1. Press

Features

Category
Selection

Item
Selection

204

2. Rotate

to display the music search list.

to select a category.

3. Press
to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
u Press
and rotate
repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector
Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

205 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with display audio system

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w *1.
: Select to go to the HOME screen.
(HOME)
(Day/Night)
Icon

Button

HOME

VOL

BACK

: Touch to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
: Select to go back to the previous display
when it is displayed.

(MENU) Icon

(Day/Night) button: Press to change
the audio/information screen brightness.
Press
once and select
or
to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.

Features

(BACK) Icon

2 Switching the Display P. 206

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 214
2 Music Search P. 217, 220, 225
2 Random/Repeat P. 218, 226
2 Scan P. 215, 218, 226

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

205

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

206 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Using the

Press the

button

(display) button on the steering wheel to change the display.
(Display) Button

Features

206

Audio/Information Screen

1Audio/Information Screen

• Use simple gestures — including touching,
swiping, and scrolling — to operate certain audio
functions.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
• You can use the microfiber soft cleaning cloth to
remove dust or fingerprints from the touchscreen.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

207 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Using the HOME screen

HOME screen

Features

Select HOME to go to the HOME screen.
Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, or HondaLink.

■ Phone
Shows the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 297

■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer, Clock/Wallpaper, Voice Info, or System/Device
Information.
Continued

207

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

208 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 252

■ HondaLink Apps
Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and
social media streams.
2 Smartphone Apps P. 231
Features
*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for compatible phones
and hondalink.com for feature details.

208

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

209 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port(s) P. 179

Continued

•
•

Features

2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select Info.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the
Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
u Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 256 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
The maximum image size is 4,096 x 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 5 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

209

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

210 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings screen.
2. Select Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a
preview at full-size screen.

■ To view wallpaper once it is set
Features

1. Press the
(Home) button.
2. Select Info.
3. Press the
(Menu) button.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper.

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings screen.
2. Select Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete.
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

210

To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
BACK.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

211 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sound.

Select the tabs to adjust the following choices:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SVC
(Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation)

Features

211

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

212 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Display Settings.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.
Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Background Color.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.

212

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

213 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

Audio/Information Screen

HOME

(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.

VOL

Seek Icons
Select
or
to search
up and down the selected band
for a station with a strong
signal.

BACK

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Scan
Select to scan each station with a
strong signal.

Tune Icons
Select
or
frequency.

Features

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

to tune the radio

Preset Icons
Turn the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
Select
to display preset 7 onwards.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
Continued

213

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

214 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select MENU.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the list.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 182
You can also switch the mode by selecting Change
Source on the MENU screen.

Features

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

■ Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select MENU while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Station List.
3. Select the station.

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select MENU while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Station List.
3. Select Refresh.

214

1Playing AM/FM Radio

1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

215 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select View Radio Text.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel.

Features

215

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

216 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA,
or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Audio/Information Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

HOME

Features

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.

VOL

Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

BACK

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.

Folder Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or
AAC.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

216

Track Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

217 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/
AAC)

1Playing a CD
NOTICE

1. Select MENU and select Music Search.

2. Select a folder.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

Track
Selection

Features

Folder
Selection

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.

3. Select a track.

Continued

217

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

218 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.
Features

218

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10second sampling of the first file in each of the main
folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files
in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

219 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 179
Audio/Information Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.

USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.

Features

HOME

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.

VOL

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

BACK

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Cover Art

Songs Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
Continued

219

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

220 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.
2. Select the items on that menu.

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234

Folder
Selection
Features
Track
Selection

220

If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the display audio
system, you may no longer be able to operate the
same app on the display audio. Reconnect the device
if necessary.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

221 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.

Features

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode

221

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

222 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

U.S. models
Compatible phones only

1Playing Internet Radio

Playing Internet Radio

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.

Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
2 Phone Setup P. 305
iPhone only

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Select
Source to select Pandora mode.
Cover Art

Audio/Information Screen
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Features
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display
the menu items.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.

Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

222

Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a
song.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play
a song.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

223 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Bookmark
• Station List
• New Station
• Change Source
• Sound

■ Operating a menu item

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.

Features

1. Select MENU.
2. Select an item.

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 235
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.

223

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

224 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 179
Audio/Information Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Features

HOME

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.

VOL

Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

BACK

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.

Folder Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

224

Track Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

225 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Research List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

1. Select MENU and select Music Search.

Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 237
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.

2. Select a folder.

Track
Selection

3. Select a track.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234
Features

Folder
Selection

Continued

225

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

226 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.
Features

226

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

227 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

VOL

BACK

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.

Pause Icon

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically linked.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.

Play Icon

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.

Features

(MENU) Icon
Select to display the
menu items.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.

HOME

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Track Icons
Select
or
tracks.
Group Icons
Select
or

to change

to change group.

*1:Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not
be displayed.
Continued

A No Device Connected message may be displayed
if:
• The phone is not linked to HFL.
• The phone is not turned on.
• The phone is not in the vehicle.
• An incompatible phone is connected.
The following functions may not be available on
some devices:
• Pause function
• Group selection

227

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

228 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.

2 Phone Setup P. 305

2. Press the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

▲

If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

Features

■ To pause or resume a file
Select the play icon or pause icon, respectively.

■ Searching for Music

1Searching for Music

1. Select MENU.
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

228

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

229 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a Video Using the HDMI®

Playing a Video Using the HDMI®
Your audio system allows you to play videos from an HDMI®-compatible device
when parked.
Connect the device, using an HDMI® cable, then select the HDMI® mode.
2 HDMI® Port * P. 180

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

HOME

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu
items.

VOL

BACK

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous display.

* Not available on all models

Continued

229

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

230 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a Video Using the HDMI®

■ Changing the Screen Aspect
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Aspect Ratio Adjustment.
5. Select the setting you want.
6. Select OK.

Features

230

1Playing a Video Using the HDMI®
This feature is limited while driving. To play videos,
stop your vehicle and apply the parking brake.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

231 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmartphone Apps

Smartphone Apps
You can connect a compatible smartphone to the system to enable integration
between the smartphone’s approved apps and the vehicle. This allows you to
control the phone through the vehicle display. To check smart phone compatibility,
download the HondaLink app, and view connection instructions, visit
handsfreelink.honda.com. For the latest apps and feature details, check
hondalink.com.
(HOME) Icon
Select to go back to HOME or to a previous
display.
Microphone

Microphone

Park in a safe place before connecting your phone
and while operating the displayed apps.
Not all phones and apps are compatible with the
system. The system does not display all the available
apps on smartphone, and some apps need to be
preinstalled. Ask a dealer for details.
You need to switch the Bluetooth connection to your
smartphone if another electronic device is connected.
2 Changing the currently paired phone
P. 306

VOL

Features

The following may vary by phone type:
• How to connect a smartphone to the system.
• Apps that can be operated on the screen.
• Display response time/update time.
We do not support every app operation on the
display audio.
Ask the app provider for any questions on the app’s
features.

HOME

(MENU) Icon
Select to display
the menu on the
app you selected.
(Not available on
all apps.)

1Smartphone Apps

BACK

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous display.
(Not available on all phones.)

231

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

232 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free

Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the Talk button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is
paired to Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.

1Siri® Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

2 Phone Setup P. 305
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
When operating the vehicle, only use Siri through the
Talk button.

■ Using Siri® Eyes Free

1Using Siri® Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.

Features

Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Eyes Free
While in Siri® Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

232

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

233 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message
Unplayable File

Track/file format not supported

Mechanical error

Solution
• Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.

• Press the
(eject) button and remove the disc, and check that
the error message is cleared.
• Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 238

Mecha Error
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual*1
Bad Disc
Please check
owners manual.*2

Servo error

Check Disc

Disc error

Heat Error

High temperature

• If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
• Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
• If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Features

Bad Disc
Please check Owner’s
Manual
Please push eject button*1
Bad Disc
Please check
owners manual.
Push Eject*2

Cause

• Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 238

• Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

*1 : Display audio system
*2 : Color audio system

233

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

234 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution

Features

USB Error

Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible
with the USB adapter unit.

The connected USB device has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual*1
Bad USB Device*2

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the
audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Unsupported Version*1
Unsupported Ver*2

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is
connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Connect Retry*1
Retry Connection*2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error
message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.
No Data*1, *2
USB No Song*2
iPod No Song*2

USB flash drive

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the
USB flash drive.
iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
*1 : Display audio system
*2 : Color audio system

234

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

235 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

Models with display audio system

Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
The maximum number of stations has been created.
To create more, please delete one or more previously created
stations.

Solution
●

Appears when the number of stations that can be created is
exceeded. Follow the message.

●

Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again
later.

●

Appears when the station you selected is not available. Change a
station, or try again later.

●

Appears when you have not logged into Pandora®. Follow the
message.

●

Appears when failed to connect. Check your device and try again.

Unable to create new station. Please try again.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.

This Pandora station is currently not available. Please select
another station.
Unable to play Pandora. When stopped, log-in to Pandora.

Features

Unable to save bookmark.

Unable to connect to Pandora. When stopped, check your
mobile phone.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Connect Retry

Continued

235

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

236 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

Error Message

Solution

Unsupported

• Appears when the device is not supported. Use another device.

Unsupported Version

• Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.

Pandora App version is not supported

Unable to connect to the phone.
• Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check the
Please make sure the phone’s Bluetooth setting is ON and try
Bluetooth status on your device.
again.

Features

No Data

• Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

The connected USB device has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual

• Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.

No stations found. Please create a station.

• Appears when there is no station list on the device. Create one
on your device.

The maximum number of tracks that can be skipped per hour • Appears when you try to skip a song or select dislike over the
has been reached.
predetermined number of times in an hour.

236

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

237 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

General Information on the Audio System
Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.

1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.

The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

■ CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
Features

• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

Continued

237

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

238 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

1Protecting CDs
NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs

Bubbled/
Wrinkled

Features

●

Using
Printer Label
Kit

Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs

Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs

3-inch (8-cm)
CD

238

With Label/
Sticker

Warped

Burrs

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

239 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5

•
•
•
•
•

A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.

1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.

Features

■ USB Flash Drives

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

239

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

240 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Honda App License Agreement
■ END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND
CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL
SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR
OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919
TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND
ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A
THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S
PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
Features

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE
during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The
SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content
provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through
the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.
1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)
as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a
DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the
“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be
specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while
you are using the SOFTWARE.

240

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

241 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source
licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors
of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.
Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual
or within the SOFTWARE.

Features

4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER
TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,
conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,
targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
(a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance
with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA
(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under
the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.

Continued

241

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

242 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Features

(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device
other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,
HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or
any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER
TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver
distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,
and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software
licenses.
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying
DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This
AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,
affiliates, or suppliers.

242

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

243 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export
jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other
governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in
violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.

Features

2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their
jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by
their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal
information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require
that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER
SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the
inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER
SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,
directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of
such websites and content.

Continued

243

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

244 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge
and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any
fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.

Features

6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-theair, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be
updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other
applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not
provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and
VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings
1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The
traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),
travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to
provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,
or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.

244

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

245 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,
routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency
services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such
navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.

Features

3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands
when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)
consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA
and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors
are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address
any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such
interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in
a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable
to hear these sounds could result in a crash.

Continued

245

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

246 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

E. Information Collection and Storage
1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may
collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.
HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.
HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease
of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved
destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
Features

(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE
(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and
malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,
battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,
diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA
for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period
of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data
(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is
at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information
uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and
safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.

246

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

247 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Features

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result
from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, noninfringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely
on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We
do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via
the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the
accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s
fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW
ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

Continued

247

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

248 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,
indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,
without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does
not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such
states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for
any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,
and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA
or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES
interruptions of any length.
Features

(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,
PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in
connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the
total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,
strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE
or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN
DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS
LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND
AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO
ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has
ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone
making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

248

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

249 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia
system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within
the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of
or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any
portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given
location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy
shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

K. Termination and Transfer.
1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,
and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to
comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

Features

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA
instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact
HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided
you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or
transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

Continued

249

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

250 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless
explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall
respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from
time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion
thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,
suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

Features

250

M. ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU
MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE
HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE
MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.
Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to
court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the
Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third
party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any
representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek
remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact
these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,
HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator
may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

251 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow
substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of
this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall
include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is
unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at
Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after
providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

Features

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional
HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this
AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole
remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the
balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as
explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of
California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of
another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not
prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included
for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

251

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

252 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Continuously variable transmission models

• Shift to (P .
Manual transmission models

• Set the parking brake.

Models with color audio system

■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w , press the
MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings,
press the
button, then select Phone Setup.
Features

Audio/Information Screen
(Phone) Button

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
To customize other features, select Settings, rotate
, then press
.
2 List of customizable options P. 256

MENU/CLOCK Button

Selector Knob

252

1How to customize

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

253 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with color audio system

■ Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

Adjust Clock

Settings

Bluetooth

Add New Device
Connect an Audio Device

Features

Display Adjustment

Brightness
Contrast
Black Level

Rear Camera

Camera Guideline

Continued

253

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

254 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Display Change

Audio
Wallpaper

Wallpaper

Select
Import
Delete

Features

Color Theme

Blue
Red
Amber
Gray

Language

Clock Format

12h
24h

254

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

255 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Press the

button and rotate

to select Phone Setup, then press

Bluetooth Setup

.
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key

Ringtone

Features

Speed Dial

Fixed
Mobile Phone

Caller ID Info

Name Priority
Number Priority

System Clear

Continued

255

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

256 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with color audio system

■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Selectable Settings

Adjusts the clock.

Adjust Clock

—

2 Clock P. 96

Add New Device
Bluetooth

Features

Brightness

Settings

Display
Contrast
Adjustment
Black Level
Rear
Camera
*1:Default Setting

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a code for a paired
phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 280

Connect an Audio
Device

256

Description

Camera Guideline

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
Selects whether the guidelines come on the
audio/information screen.

—
—
—
—
On*1/Off

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

257 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Display Change
Select
Wallpaper

Import
Delete

Settings
Color Theme
Language

Changes the display type.
Changes the wallpaper type.

Selectable Settings
Audio*1/Wallpaper
Clock*1/Image1/Image2/
Image3

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

—

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 187

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the display language.
Selects the digital clock display from 12H to
24H.

Image1*1/Image2/Image3
Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray
English*1/Français/Español
12h*1/24h

Features

Clock Format

Description

*1:Default Setting

Continued

257

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

258 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Bluetooth
Setup

Phone
Setup
Features

Speed Dial
Ringtone
Caller ID Info
System Clear
*1:Default Setting

258

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 280

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone
to HFL.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 280

Connect an Audio
Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

—

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.
Deletes a paired phone.
Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

—
—
—
—

2 Speed Dial P. 287

Selects the ring tone.
Fixed /Mobile Phone
Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number
as the caller ID.
Priority
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
—
Phone Setup group as default.
*1

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

259 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with display audio system

1Customized Features

■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w *1, select
Settings, then select a setting item.

When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

•

Continuously variable transmission models

Shift to (P .

•

Manual transmission models

Set the parking brake.
Audio/Information Screen
1How to customize
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 265

HOME

Features

VOL

BACK

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

259

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

260 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with display audio system

■ Customization Flow
Select HOME.

Home

Home Screen Edit Order

Display

Display Settings

Select Settings.

Brightness
Contrast
Black Level

Background Color

Features

System

Sound/Beep

Volume
Beep Volume

Voice Recog

Voice Prompt
Volume
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync

Clock

Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Clock Display
Clock Location
Clock Reset

Others

Default

260

* Not available on all models

Language
Keyboard Layout
Voice Command Tips *
Remember Last Screen
Factory Data Reset

Clock
Wallpaper

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

261 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Audio

Sound

Audio Source Pop-Up

[Your selected media] Cover Art*1

Display Adjustment*1

Brightness
Contrast
Black Level

Color

Color
Tint

Features

Display

Aspect Ratio Adjustment*1

Change Bluetooth Audio Device*1

Bluetooth Device List*1

Default

*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.

Continued

261

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

262 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Info

Clock

Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Clock Display
Clock Location
Clock Reset

Features

Other

Default

262

Info Screen Preference

Clock
Wallpaper

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

263 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Phone

Connect Phone
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Features

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification

Default

Continued

263

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

264 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Camera

Rear Wide Camera

Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default

LaneWatch *

Show with Turn Signal
Display Time after Turn Signal Off

Features

Reference Line
Default

Bluetooth

Bluetooth On/Off Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code

Default

264

* Not available on all models

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

265 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with display audio system

■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Home

System

Display

Home Screen Edit Order Changes the HOME screen icon layout.
Changes the brightness of the audio/
Brightness
information screen.
Display
Changes the contrast of the audio/
Contrast
Settings
information screen.
Changes the black level of the audio/
Black Level
information screen.
Changes the background color of the audio/
Background Color
information screen.
Volume
Changes the sound volume.
Beep Volume
Changes the beep volume.

Selectable Settings
—
—
—
—
Blue*1/Amber/Red/Violet
0-6*1-11
Off/1/2*1/3

Features

Sound/
Beep

Description

*1:Default Setting

Continued

265

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

266 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Voice
Recog

Voice Prompt
Volume
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification
Automatic Phone Sync
Clock

Features

Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Description
Turns the voice prompt on and off.
Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

Wallpaper

—

Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On/Off

Changes the clock display type.

Analog/Digital*1/Small
Digital/Off

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Blank/Galaxy*1/Metallic

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 209

Clock Adjustment
Clock
Clock Format
Clock Display
Clock Location

Adjusts the clock.

Clock Reset
*1:Default Setting

—

2 Clock P. 96

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to
24H.
Selects whether the clock display comes on.
Changes the clock display layout.

266

On /Off
0-6*1-11

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

●

System

Selectable Settings
*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items for clock
display as default.

12H*1/24H
On*1/Off
Upper Right*1/Upper Left/
Lower Right/Lower Left/
Off
Yes/No

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

267 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Language
Keyboard Layout
Voice Command Tips *
Others

System

Remember Last Screen
Factory Data Reset

Sound

Changes the display language.
Selects the on-screen keyboard type.
Alerts you when manual control of the system
is disabled to prevent distraction while driving.
Only voice commands are available.
Selects whether the device remembers the last
screen.
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 273

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
System group as default.
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s
sound
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 211

Audio
Audio Source Pop-Up

Selectable Settings
English*1/French/Spanish
Alphabet/QWERTY*1
On*1/Off
On/Off*1
Yes/No
Yes/No
-6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS and
TREBLE), RR9~0*1~FR9
(FADER), L9~0*1~R9
(BALANCE), Off/Low/Mid*1/
High (SVC)

Features

Default

Description

Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when Audio is selected on On/Off*1
the HOME screen.

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

267

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

268 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

iPod or USB mode

Audio
Features

Turns on and off the cover art display.
On*1/Off
[Your selected media] Cover Art
Brightness
2 System P. 265
Contrast
Display
HDMI® mode
Black Level
Display
Changes the color of the audio/information
Color
—
Adjustment
screen.
Color
Changes the tint of the audio/information
Tint
—
screen.
HDMI® mode
Changes the aspect ratio and zoom settings of
Normal/Full*1/Zoom
the audio/information screen.
Aspect Ratio Adjustment
Bluetooth® Audio mode
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
—
Audio device to HFL.
Change Bluetooth Audio Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
Bluetooth® Audio mode
—
paired phone.
Bluetooth Device List
2 Phone Setup P. 305

Default
*1:Default Setting

268

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Audio group as default.

Yes/No

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

269 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Clock
Info

Other

Selectable Settings

2 System P. 265

Changes the Info Screen type.
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Info group as default.

Info Top/Info Menu/Off*1
Features

Default

Clock/
Clock
Wallpaper
Wallpaper
type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Clock Display
Clock Location
Clock Reset
Info Screen Preference

Description

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting

Continued

269

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

270 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Connect Phone

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 305

Bluetooth Device List
Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone
Features

Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Enable Text/Email
Text/Email

Select Account
New Message
Notification

Default
*1:Default Setting

270

—

2 Phone Setup P. 305

Phone

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

—

2 Speed Dial P. 312

Selects the ring tone.
Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Turns HondaLink Assist on and off.
Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off.
Selects a mail or text message account.
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Phone and Text/Email group as default.

Fixed/Mobile Phone*1
On/Off
On/Off*1
On*1/Off
—
On/Off*1
Yes/No

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

271 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Camera

LaneWatch *

Selectable Settings
On*1/Off
On*1/Off
Yes/No
On*1/Off

0 second*1/2 seconds

Features

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on
on the rear camera monitor.
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come
Dynamic Guideline
on on the rear camera monitor.
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Default
Rear Wide Camera group as default.
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes
Show with Turn Signal on when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch
Display Time after Turn
display stays on after you pull the turn signal
Signal Off
lever back.
Selects whether the reference lines come on
Reference Line
the LaneWatch monitor.
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Default
LaneWatch group as default.
Fixed Guideline

Rear Wide
Camera

Description

On*1/Off
Yes/No

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

271

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

272 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Bluetooth On/Off Status
Bluetooth Device List

Changes the Bluetooth® status.
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

Selectable Settings
On /Off
*1

—

2 Phone Setup P. 305

Bluetooth
Edit Pairing Code
Default
*1:Default Setting
Features

272

Description

Edits Pairing Code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 306

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Bluetooth group as default.

Random/Fixed*1
Yes/No

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

273 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings
Models with display audio system

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
u Repeat the procedure to select the
Others tab, then Factory Data Reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
4. Select Yes to reset the settings.
5. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Select OK.

1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
• Audio preset settings
• Phonebook entries
• Other display and personal settings.

Features

273

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

274 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Models with color audio system

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
Voice control tips

Volume up
Volume down

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
Microphone

Features

(Phone) Button

(Talk) Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button

Selector Knob

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press .

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is
no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 287
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.

274

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

275 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display
Battery Level Status

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

The audio/information screen notifies you
when there is an incoming call.

Signal Strength
Roam Status
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
HFL Mode
Call Name

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.

■ Limitations for Manual Operation

Features

1HFL Status Display

You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 252

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while
the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 287

275

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

276 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

or
Phone

Speed Dial*1

Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

Add New

Features

(Existing entry list)
Call History*1

Call History

Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to
store as a speed dial number.

Phone Number

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.

Dialed Calls

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Received Calls

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Missed Calls

Display the last 20 missed calls.

Phonebook*1

Display the paired phones’s phonebook.

Dial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

276

1HFL Menus

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

277 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Phone Setup

Bluetooth Setup

Pair a phone to the system.

Connect a Phone

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect an Audio Device

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the
system.

Disconnect All Devices

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Pass-Key

Create a code for a paired phone.

Features

Add New Device

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

277

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

278 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial*1

Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

Phone Number

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.

Features

Existing entry list
Change Speed Dial

*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

278

Add New
Call History

Change a previously stored speed dial
number.

Delete Speed Dial

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Store Voice Tag

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag

Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Delete Voice Tag

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

279 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ringtone

Caller ID Info

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Mobile Phone

Select the ring tone stored in the connected
cell phone.

Name Priority

Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Number Priority

Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the
caller ID.

Features

System Clear

Fixed

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,
and security codes.

Continued

279

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

280 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (No phone has

Features

been paired to the system)
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.

5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.

280

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

281 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Change the currently paired phone
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

You can pair a phone in the following steps.
Phone Setup  Bluetooth Setup  Add New
Device  confirmation message  Yes 
confirmation message  OK  Select a Phone 
pairing code.

Features

4. Rotate
to select Connect a Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

1Phone Setup

5. Rotate
to select a desired device name,
then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.

Continued

281

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

282 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

4. Rotate
.

to select Pass-Key, then press

Features

5. Input a new pairing code, then press

282

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

283 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

Features

4. Rotate
to select Delete Device, then
press .
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .

6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.

Continued

283

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

284 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Ringtone, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Fixed or Mobile
Phone, then press .

Features

284

■ Caller’s ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Caller ID Info, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select a mode you want, then
press .

1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the
ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the
speakers.

1Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is
stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

285 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call
history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select System Clear, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .

Features

5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.

6. A notification appears on the screen. Press
.

Continued

285

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

286 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Voice

Features

Pager
If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears
instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

286

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

287 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Cha
Change
hange
ge Sp
Speed
eed Dial
Delete
Speed
Dial
D lete
Del
ete
t Sp
S
eed
d Di
ia
all

You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
store a speed dial number:
1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call.
2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Add New, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
From Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.

Continued

287

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

288 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To edit a speed dial
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Change Speed Dial,
then press .
6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.
Features

288

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

289 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed

Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag

Delete
Speed
Del
ete Sp
peed
ee Di
Dial
al

■ To change a voice tag
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Change Voice Tag,
then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

Continued

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

Change
Cha
nge
e Sp
Speed
peed
ee Di
Dial
al

dial number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

289

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

290 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a voice tag

Features
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag

290

1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

291 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

Features

Continued

291

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

292 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported

Features

phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate
to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

292

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 275
2 Speed Dial P. 287

1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 275
2 Speed Dial P. 287

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

293 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using redial

Continued

1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls.

Features

■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s call history.

293

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

294 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry
On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
list can be directly selected by pressing the
corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed
dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
button and
call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 287

Features

294

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen. Press the
button and
follow the prompts.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

295 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call
HFL Mode

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call
screen appears.
Press the
Press the

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.

Caller’s Name

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.

Continued

Features

You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the
and
buttons. Rotate
to select the icon, then press
.

295

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

296 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call

Features

296

The following options are available during a call.
Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
button.
2. Rotate
to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call
Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

297 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons
(HOME) Icon

To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting
must be On.
2 Customized Features P. 252

Microphones

Buttons

Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook, name or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on
the steering wheel.

HOME

VOL

BACK

(MENU) Icon
(Talk) Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button

Features

Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.

Models with display audio system

(MENU) Button
Volume down
Volume up
SOURCE Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Continued

297

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

298 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen, or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
command, or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook,
name, or a number.
button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the Phone
screen.
/
button: Press to select an item displayed on the Phone screen.
SOURCE button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the Phone
screen.
Features

298

To go to the Phone menu screen:
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Phone to switch the display to the Phone screen.
3. Select MENU.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Up to six speed dial entries can be displayed among a
total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entries
in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 312
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

299 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your phone
is connected to HFL.

Battery Level Status
Signal Strength

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language.
2 Customized Features P. 252

HFL Mode
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Features

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phone book names, or
numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 312

299

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

300 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible mobile phone to the system while the
vehicle is parked.

■ Phone settings screen
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Phone Settings.

Features

Phone

Connect Phone*2

Bluetooth Device List

Some functions are limited while driving.

Add Bluetooth Device

Pair a phone to the system.

(Existing entry list)

Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

(Existing entry list)*2

Add Bluetooth Device

Edit Device Name

Edit a previously paired
phone name.

Delete This Device

Delete a previously paired
phone.

Pair a phone to the system.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

300

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

301 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Edit Speed Dial*1

New Entry

(Existing entry list)

Enter a phone number to
store as a speed dial number.

Import from Call History

Select a phone number from
the call history to store as a
speed dial number.

Import from Phonebook

Select a phone number from
the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.

Edit

Edit a previously stored speed
dial number.
● Change a name.
● Change a number.
● Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete

Delete a previously stored
speed dial number.

Features

Delete All

Manual Input

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

Ring Tone

Select the ring tone.

Automatic Phone Sync*1

Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

HondaLink Assist*1

Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

301

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

302 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Text/Email*1

Enable Text/Email

Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.

Select Account

Select a mail or text message account.

New Message Notification Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.

Features

Default

*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

302

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

303 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone menu screen
1. Press
, or select HOME, then select
Phone.
2. Press
(MENU) on the steering wheel, or
select MENU.

New Entry

Manual Input

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.

Import from Call History

Select a phone number from the call history to store
as a speed dial number.

Import from Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store
as a speed dial number.

Features

Speed Dial*1

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Phonebook*1

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Dial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

303

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

304 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Call History*1

Text/Email*1

All

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Dialed

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Received

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Missed

Display the last 20 missed calls.

Select Account *

Features

Select a message.
Message is read aloud.

*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

304

* Not available on all models

Select a mail or text message account.

Read/Stop

System reads received message aloud, or stop
message from being read.

(previous)

See the previous message.

(next)

See the next message.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed
phrases.

Call

Make a call to the sender.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

305 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a mobile phone (when there is

Continued

Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system, the system will return to the
previous screen.

Features

no phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Yes.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select OK.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone not found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.This may vary by
phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.

305

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

306 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Changing the currently paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select Connect Phone.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the current phone and
starts searching for another paired
phone.

■ To change the pairing code setting

Features

306

1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select the Bluetooth tab.
5. Select Edit Pairing Code.
6. Select Fixed or Random.

1Changing the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.

1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

307 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To edit an already-paired phone name
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select the Phone tab.
3. Select Bluetooth Device List.
4. Select a paired phone you want to edit.
5. Select Edit Device Name.
6. Edit the name and select OK.
7. A notification appears if the change is
successful.

Features

Continued

307

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

308 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select the Phone tab.
3. Select Bluetooth Device List.
4. Select a phone you want to delete.
5. Select Delete This Device.
6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Select Yes.
7. A notification appears if the deletion is
successful.
Features

308

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

309 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message Options
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New
Message Notification.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

Continued

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

Features

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

309

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

310 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select the Phone tab, then Ring Tone.
3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.

Features

310

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone is heard through the vehicle
speakers.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

311 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

Work

Voice

setting
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

Pager

2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select the Phone tab, then Automatic
Phone Sync.
3. Select On or Off.

Continued

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.

Features

Pref

The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

311

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

312 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 303

Features

312

2. Select Speed Dial.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Select a place to choose a number.
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or
No.
5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the
speed dial entry.
u Using the
button, follow the prompts
to store a voice tag for the speed dial
entry.

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

313 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record to store the voice tag.
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

Continued

313

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

314 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the stored
voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

314

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

315 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 303

2. Select Phonebook.
3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select
Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering letters.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Features

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 303

2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

315

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

316 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 303

1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.

2. Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using the call history
Features

Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 303

1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)

2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 303

2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

316

1To make a call using a speed dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 312

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

317 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming call
screen appears.
Press the
Press the

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.

The available options appear on the screen during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Mute Icon
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to
your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call.
This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.

Continued

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

Features

■ Options During a Call

You can select the icons on the touch screen.

317

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

318 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
HFL can display newly received text and e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

Features

318

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text or e-mail message.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text or e-mail message is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.

1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text and e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text or e-mail message for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Message Notification
setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 309

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

319 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

If a paired phone has text or mail message accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Messages or an e-mail account
you want.
Features

Select
Account

You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

Continued

319

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

320 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

1Displaying Messages

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

2 Phone menu screen P. 303

2. Select Text/Email.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
Text Message
Features

320

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, select
(previous) or
(next) on the message screen.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

321 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

■ Displaying e-mails
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 303

Message List

2. Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
u The e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

Features

E-mail

Continued

321

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

322 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 320

2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the
message from the beginning.

■ Reply to a message

Features

322

1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 320

2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

323 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.

Features

Continued

323

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

324 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ In Case of Emergency

1In Case of Emergency

■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition will be sent to the
operator; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
Features

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.

324

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
• You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
• There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

325 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To enable notification

1To enable notification

1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 300

2. Select Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

Setting options:
• On: Notification is available.
• Off: Disable the feature.

Features

325

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

326

326 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

327 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving
Driving Preparation ................................... 328
Maximum Load Limit ................................ 331
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 334
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines............... 337
When Driving
Models without smart entry system
Starting the Engine ................................... 339
Models with smart entry system
Starting the Engine ................................... 342
Precautions While Driving ......................... 346
Continuously Variable Transmission * ......... 347
Continuously variable transmission models
without paddle shifters
Shifting..................................................... 348

* Not available on all models

Continuously variable transmission models
with paddle shifters
Shifting .......................................................... 350

Manual transmission models
Shifting .......................................................... 354
ECON Button * ................................................ 357
Cruise Control ................................................ 358
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * ................. 361
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * .................... 365
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System .................................. 368
LaneWatchTM * ................................................ 370
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM* .... 372
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......... 373
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation ...................................... 375

Braking
Brake System ................................... 377
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 383
Brake Assist System ......................... 384
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 385
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 386
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 388
How to Refuel ................................. 389
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing
CO2 Emissions................................ 390

327

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

328 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving

328

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

329 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

■ Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming
readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 331

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 107

• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.

Driving

• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 142
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 144

• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 140
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 139

Continued

329

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

330 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 38

• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 74

Driving

330

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

331 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.

1Maximum Load Limit

3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.

Label Example

Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Continued

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 480

Driving

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 480

331

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

332 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)

Example2

332

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

333 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.

Driving

333

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

334 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Towing Your Vehicle
Continuously variable transmission models

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

1Towing Your Vehicle
Manual transmission models

Do not exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).

2 Emergency Towing P. 475
Manual transmission models

Your vehicle can be towed behind a motorhome.
Manual transmission models

■ When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome

Driving

Perform the following procedure before towing your vehicle.
1. Shift to (N .
2. Release the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q *1.
u Make sure the steering wheel does not lock.
4. Turn off all the electric devices. Do not use any accessory power sockets.
u This can prevent the battery from running down.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

334

Consult your towing parts sales or rental agency if
any other items are recommended or required for
your towing situation.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

335 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

■ Extended towing
If you tow more than eight hours in one day, you should repeat the “When Your
Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome” at least every eight hours.
You also need to perform the following procedure to prevent the battery from
running down.
Interior Fuse Box

1Towing Your Vehicle
Make sure to reinstall the fuses before you start
driving your vehicle.

Models without smart entry system

1. Remove the 20 A accessory power socket
and 7.5 A ACC fuses. These fuses are
located in the interior fuse box.
2 Interior Fuse Boxes P. 472

2. Remove the 10 A Back up fuse. This fuse is
located in the engine compartment fuse
box.
2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 470

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Driving

20 A Accessory
Power Socket Fuse
7.5 A ACC fuse

3. Store the fuses in a safe place so you do not
lose them.
u Make sure to reinstall the fuses before
you start driving your vehicle.
4. Shift to (N .
5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY
(q .
u Make sure the steering wheel does not
lock.

10 A Back Up Fuse
Continued

335

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

336 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Interior Fuse Box

Models with smart entry system

1. Remove the 20 A accessory power socket and 7.5 A ACC fuses. These fuses are located in the
interior fuse box.
2 Interior Fuse Boxes P. 472

2. Remove the 10 A Back up fuse. This fuse is located in the engine compartment fuse box.
2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 470

20 A Accessory
Power Socket Fuse
7.5 A ACC fuse
Driving

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

10 A Back Up Fuse

336

3. Store the fuses in a safe place so you do not lose them.
u Make sure to reinstall the fuses before you start driving your vehicle.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the clutch pedal.
u The indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button blinks.
5. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote
while the indicator is blinking.
u The indicator stop blinking, then stays on.
6. Shift to (N .
7. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the clutch pedal.
u Make sure the steering wheel does not lock.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

337 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher
ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat
different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it
does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get
acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
• Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 331

3 WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or offpavement can cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers could be
seriously injured or killed.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in
this owner’s manual.
• Keep your speed low, and don’t drive
faster than conditions permit.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 32
2 Precautions While Driving P. 346

Driving

• Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
• Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
• It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.

1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

337

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

338 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble

Avoiding Trouble

Driving

338

• Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
• Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have
limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and
power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in
a hazardous situation.
• Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start
or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
• Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover
or damage to your suspension or other components.
• Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to
drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually
the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it
before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it.
Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around.
Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
• Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water
in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully
before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find
another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The
water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and
causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
• If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could
damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need
to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

339 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

When Driving
Models without smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up to electric parking brake switch.

Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal

Continuously variable transmission models

2. Check that the transmission is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system */climate control system *, and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

Clutch Pedal

Driving

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.

Brake Pedal

* Not available on all models

Continued

339

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

340 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 30 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 118

Driving

■ Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in (D . Select (R
when reversing.
2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the electric parking brake indicator goes off.
2 Parking Brake P. 377

340

1Starting to Drive
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

341 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Manual transmission models

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.

Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Driving

341

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

342 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Models with smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up to electric parking brake switch.

Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal

Continuously variable transmission models

2. Check that the transmission is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

Driving

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Clutch Pedal

Brake Pedal

342

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.

Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.If an improperly coded device is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 118

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

343 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
ENGINE
START
STOP

1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 458
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.

Driving

Continued

343

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

344 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Continuously variable transmission models

1. Put the transmission into (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Manual transmission models

• If the transmission is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the transmission in any gear other than (N , depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.

■ Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models

Driving

344

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

345 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.

Driving

345

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

346 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving
■ Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
• Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
• Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory).

■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under
these conditions can eventually damage the system.

Driving

If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1
while driving, the engine will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.

346

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

347 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission *

■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 32
2 Precautions While Driving P. 346

Continuously Variable Transmission *
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown

* Not available on all models

Driving

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

347

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

348 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■ Shift lever positions

Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Driving

Drive
Used for normal driving

Release Button

Drive (S)
Used:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
Low
Used to further increase engine
braking
● Used when going up or down hills
●

348

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

349 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Driving

Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.

If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

349

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

350 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Driving

Drive
Used:
● For normal driving
● When temporarily driving in the
7-speed manual shift mode

Release Button

350

Drive (S)
Used for:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
● When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode

You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

351 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator

Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

Continued

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Driving

Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

351

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

352 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.

■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the
paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
Driving

■ When the shift lever is in (S :
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to
(D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.

352

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift
up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain
circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift
indicator remains as 7.
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

353 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
The shift indicator may also blink when you cannot
shift down while driving in low speed. This prevents
the transmission from being damaged.

Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)

Driving

Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)

353

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

354 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Manual transmission models

Shifting
■ Shift Lever Operation
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”

Driving

354

1Shifting
NOTICE

Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

355 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.

1Shifting
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.

Driving

Continued

355

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

356 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R .
2. If you still cannot shift into (R , apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R .
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Driving

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

356

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

357 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button *

ECON Button *
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on
and off. The ECON mode helps you improve
your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission,
heating and cooling system */climate control
system *, and cruise control.

1ECON Button *
Models with climate control system

While in ECON mode, the climate control system has
greater temperature fluctuations.

Driving

* Not available on all models

357

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

358 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.

When to use

■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:

1Cruise Control

Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.

Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.

Continuously variable transmission models

■ Shift positions for cruise control:

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.

In (D or (S

How to use

CRUISE MAIN is on in
the instrument panel.

Driving

Cruise control is ready to
use.

■ Press the CRUISE
button on the
steering wheel.

When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
Models with ECON button

While in ECON mode, it may take relatively more time
to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
Manual transmission models

When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.

358

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

359 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed

-/SET Button

On
Press and release

On when cruise control begins
Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the -/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the -/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

Continued

359

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

360 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or -/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.

You can set the vehicle speed using the -/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Driving

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.

■ To Cancel
CRUISE Button

To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Manual transmission models

CANCEL
Button

• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

360

1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

361 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

Canadian models

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *

Alerts you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with the
vehicle detected in front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).

■ How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).

Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2 To change vehicle distance and to turn the
system on and off P. 363

You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:

NORMAL
SHORT

Your Vehicle

* Not available on all models

Driving

The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2 LDW Camera P. 366

LONG

Vehicle Ahead

Continued

361

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

362 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
The camera is located behind
the rearview mirror.

Beep

Driving

362

* Not available on all models

The beeper sounds and
the FCW indicator
blinks until a possible
collision is avoided.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

363 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

■ To change vehicle distance and to turn the system on and off
Press the
(FCW) button to change FCW
range.
Each time you press the button, the warning
distance (the distance behind a vehicle
detected ahead of you) setting cycles through
FCW LONG, FCW NORMAL, and FCW
SHORT warning distance.
2 Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 87

To turn the system on and off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.

Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.

1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a
reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the
camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.

Driving

■ Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on
when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW system.
Continued

363

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

364 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

■ FCW Limitations
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead
of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●

Driving

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

364

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a tractor.
When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly
detect a vehicle in front of you.
When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned out.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

365 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

Canadian models

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *

1Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *

Alerts you when the system determines it is possible of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over detected left or right side lane markings.

■ How the System Works
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator
blinks, letting you know that you need to take
appropriate action.

Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

365

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

366 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

■ How the System Activates
The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are
met:
• The vehicle is traveling between at 45-90 mph (72-145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not pressed.

■ LDW Camera
The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.

LDW Camera

Driving

■ LDW On and Off
Indicator

LDW Button

366

Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.

1How the System Activates
LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 86
1LDW Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a
reflective sunshade that can concentrate heat on the
camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the LDW system.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

367 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

■ LDW Limitations
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●
●

Driving

●

When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
u The camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.
When the road has many repaired areas or an erased lane line.
When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.
When you drive in a lane with worn-out lane markups.

367

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

368 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

■ VSA® Operation
VSA® System
Indicator

Driving

368

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

369 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/
features, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.

VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

Driving

Your vehicle will have normal braking and
cornering ability, but traction control function
will be less effective.

When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.

369

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

370 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

LaneWatchTM *
LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear
areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to
the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these
areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use
of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience
while driving.
The system activates when you:
Move the turn
signal lever to the
passenger side.

The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information
screen.

Press the
LaneWatch
button.

Driving

Press the LaneWatch
button again.

370

* Not available on all models

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

Camera
Audio/Information Screen

3 WARNING

Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.

The system deactivates when you:
Pull the turn signal
lever back.

1LaneWatchTM *

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
• Your tires are over or under inflated.
• Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

371 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch
display time after you pull the turn signal lever back.
• Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Next Maneuver Pop up *: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 252

■ Reference Lines

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen slightly look
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R .
For proper LaneWatch operation:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens
is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth
to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

Driving

Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.

1LaneWatchTM *

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

* Not available on all models

371

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

372 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM *

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM *
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of
front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This
allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking
that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front
wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.

Driving

372

* Not available on all models

1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM *
NOTICE

Do not continuously spin the front tires of your
vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can
cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The AWD system may not function properly if tire
type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same
size and type of tire, and the air pressures as
specified.
2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 430

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

373 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

U.S. models only

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on.

■ TPMS Calibration

The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.

Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 423

Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.

Driving

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423

You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.

• Manual transmission models
The shift lever is in (N .
• Continuously variable transmission models
The shift lever is in (P .
• All models
The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
• Snow chains are used.

373

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

374 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
• If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.

1TPMS Calibration

• TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.

• The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
• During this period, if the ignition is turned on*1 and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that
the calibration process is not yet complete.

TPMS Button
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.

Driving

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

374

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

375 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

U.S. models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Continued

375

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

376 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

Driving

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

376

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

377 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

■ To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
position the ignition switch*1 is in.

Electric Parking
Brake Switch

Manually releasing the parking brake using
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2 Jump Starting P. 460
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake
switch while driving, the brakes on all four
wheels are applied by the VSA system until the
vehicle come to a stop. The electric parking
brake then applies, and the switch should be
released.

Driving

Electric Parking
Brake Switch

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on.
■ To release
The vehicle must be ON (w *1 in order to
release the electric parking brake.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes
off.

You may hear the electric parking brake system
operating from the rear wheel area when you apply
or release the parking brake, or turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0 *1. This is normal.

In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system
is applied.
• When the engine is turned off while the brake hold
system is applied.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

377

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

378 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ To release automatically

1Parking Brake

Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle
facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Continuously variable transmission models

Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Manual transmission models

Depressing the accelerator pedal while releasing the clutch pedal releases the
parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes
off.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Malfunction indicator lamp
• Transmission indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Electric parking brake system indicator
• VSA® system indicator
• ABS indicator
• Supplemental restraint system indicator

Driving

Accelerator Pedal
Clutch Pedal

Accelerator Pedal

378

If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.

Manual transmission models

Gently depress the accelerator pedal and
release the clutch pedal.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes
off.

Manual transmission models

The clutch pedal must be fully depressed before
gently depressing the accelerator pedal and releasing
the clutch pedal.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

379 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBrakinguBrake System

The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
Continuously variable transmission models

• The transmission is not in (P or (N .
Manual transmission models

• The transmission is not in (N .

■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission
use a lower gear for greater engine braking.

Driving

2 Brake Assist System P. 384
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 383

1Foot Brake

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Continued

379

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

380 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Automatic Brake Hold

1Automatic Brake Hold

3 WARNING

Continuously variable transmission models

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

■ Turning on the system

■ Activating the system

Comes
On

Goes
Off

U.S.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Driving

380

Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
● The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.

Brake Pedal

■ Canceling the system

Comes
On

Accelerator Pedal

Canada
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop. The shift lever must
be in other than (P or (R .
● The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
● Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.

Depress the accelerator
pedal while the shift
lever is in other than (P
or (N . The system is
canceled and the vehicle
starts to move.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
releases the brake
automatically.

Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.

3 WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in (P and applying the parking
brake.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

381 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBrakinguBrake System

Manual transmission models

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until you change a gear to a
position other than (N and:
• Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
• Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights
and in heavy traffic.

■ Turning on the system

■ Activating the system

Comes
On

On
Comes
On

U.S.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button

Clutch Pedal
On
Goes
Off

Comes
On

Canada
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
● Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.

Accelerator Pedal
Shift into one of the
gears other than (N and:
● Release the clutch
pedal on a level road
or when facing
downhill.
● Release the clutch
pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal
when facing uphill.
The system is canceled
and the vehicle starts to
move.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator goes off.
The system releases the
brake automatically.
Continued

Driving

Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
● The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.

Brake Pedal

■ Canceling the system

381

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

382 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models

• You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P or (R .

■ The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
•
•
•
•

Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
The engine is turned off.
There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

Manual transmission models

1Automatic Brake Hold
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2 When Stopped P. 385
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is
off.
Manual transmission models

The system turns off if the engine stalls while
automatic brake hold is active or the system is on.

• The engine stalls.

■ Turning off the automatic brake hold system
Driving
Goes
Off

Automatic Brake
Hold Button

382

While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
while the system is in operation, press the
automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.

1Turning on the system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation. The system generates sound while holding
the vehicle and it moves.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

383 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:
• Wet or snow covered roads.
• Roads paved with stone.
• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of
the wrong size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking will not be affected, there is a
possibility that the ABS will not operating. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing
the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is
designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to
skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
• You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
• The tires are equipped with snow chains.

Driving

■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The following may be observed with the ABS system:

• Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or
when system checks are being performed after the
engine has been started and while vehicle is
accelerates.
• Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.

383

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

384 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System
■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Driving

384

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

385 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
Continuously variable transmission models

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
Manual transmission models

3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1 .
4. Turn off the engine.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes off in about 15 seconds.
Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an
incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
Continuously variable transmission models

The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Driving

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

385

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

386 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the transmission is put into
(R .

■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

Normal View Mode

Camera
Driving

Models with display audio system

Top Down View Mode

Bumper

386

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 259
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

387 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.
Models with color audio system

Press the LIST/SELECT (selector) knob to switch the angle.
Models with display audio system

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view
: Normal view
: Top down view
All models

Driving

• If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the
next time you put the transmission into (R .
• If Top down view was last used before you turned off the engine, Wide View
mode is selected next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 and put the
transmission into (R .
• If Top down view was last used more than 10 seconds after you put the
transmission from (R , Wide View mode is selected the next time you put the
transmission into (R .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

387

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

388 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.

■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Driving

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 liters)

388

1Fuel Information
NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

389 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle
under the driver’s side lower outside corner
of the dashboard.
u The fuel fill door opens.

Fuel Fill Door
Release Handle

Pull

4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

1How to Refuel

3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.

Cap

Holder

5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

Driving

Cap

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.

389

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

390 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven

Gallons of
fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy

Driving

390

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

391 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 392
Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 393
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 394
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 395
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 399
Opening the Hood ........................... 400
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 401
Oil Check ......................................... 402
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 403

* Not available on all models

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 404
Engine Coolant ................................ 406
Transmission Fluid............................ 408
Brake/Clutch * Fluid .......................... 409
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 410
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 411
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades.... 419
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 423
Tire and Loading Information Label .. 425
Tire Labeling .................................... 425
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).. 427
Wear Indicators................................ 429

Tire Service Life................................ 429
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 430
Tire Rotation.................................... 431
Winter Tires ..................................... 432
Battery............................................... 433
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 435
Heating and Cooling System */Climate
Control System * Maintenance....... 437
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 438
Exterior Care.................................... 440
Accessories and Modifications ........ 443

391

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

392 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.

■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake/clutch * fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch * Fluid P. 409

• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Maintenance

392

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 411

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 397
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 489

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 419

* Not available on all models

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

393 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given
task.

■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.

3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

■ Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

393

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

394 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

Maintenance

394

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

395 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press the
(select/reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator (
) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

Maintenance

Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

395

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

396 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display

(select/reset) knob.
Explanation

Information

The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.

The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.

Maintenance Minder Indicator

Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
It goes off when the display is
The SERVICE message also starts The engine oil has almost reached switched.
to appear along with the engine oil the end of its service life, and the
life indicator and the maintenance maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
item codes.
possible.
Maintenance

396

Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

397 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance
Minder Indicator

1Maintenance Service Items

• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance Minder Message

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Main Item

Sub Items

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●
●

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
6

●
●

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid *

Maintenance

●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Continuously variable transmission models only

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).

* Not available on all models

Continued

397

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

398 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the
(select/reset) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for 10 seconds
or more.
u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the
knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.

Maintenance
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

398

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

399 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Brake/Clutch * Fluid
(Black Cap)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)

Battery

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Maintenance

Radiator Cap

* Not available on all models

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

399

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

400 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.

1Opening the Hood
NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

3. Push the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center) to
the side and raise the hood. Once you have
raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.

Lever
Maintenance

Grip

Support Rod

400

Clamp

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

401 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.

1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.

0W-20

Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

401

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

402 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

Maintenance

402

Upper Mark
Lower Mark

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil, being careful not to overfill.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

403 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.

1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Maintenance

403

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

404 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the Maintenance Minder message on
the information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
Under
engine off.
Cover
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
2WD models

3. Remove the bolts and clips on the
undercarriage and remove the under
cover.
Bolt

Maintenance

Clip
Washer

Drain Bolt

404

All models

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

405 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Oil Filter

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.

Maintenance

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

405

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

406 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1Engine Coolant

3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.

■ Reserve Tank

MAX
MIN

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.

Maintenance

Reserve Tank

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.

406

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

407 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

■ Radiator

Radiator Cap

1Radiator

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system. Do not push the cap down
when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counter-clockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.

Maintenance

407

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

408 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
Continuously variable transmission models

■ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE

Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle limited warranty.

Manual transmission models

■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Maintenance

408

1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

409 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch * Fluid

Brake/Clutch * Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.

■ Checking the Brake/Clutch * Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.
MAX
MIN

Manual transmission models

The brake fluid reserve tank is also used for
your vehicle’s clutch fluid. As long as you keep
the brake fluid level as instructed above, there
is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.

1Brake/Clutch * Fluid
NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

409

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

410 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Models without washer level sensor

Window Washer Reservoir

Check the amount of window washer fluid by
looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Canadian models

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator comes on.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Maintenance

410

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the window washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the window
washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer
fluid.
Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime
scale build up.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

411 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
High/Low beam headlight: 60/55 W (HB2 for halogen bulb type)

■ High/Low Beam Headlight
Rubber Weather Seal

1. Remove the coupler.
2. Remove the rubber weather seal.

Hold-Down Wire

3. Remove the hold-down wire, then remove
the bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the hold-down wire. Hook the end
of the wire on the knob in the slot.
6. Reinstall the rubber weather seal.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Maintenance

Slot

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Coupler

Bulb

1Headlight Bulbs

411

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

412 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb

Socket

Maintenance

412

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

413 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs

Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Side Marker Light: 5 W
Bulb

1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Socket

Fog Light Bulbs *

1Fog Light Bulbs *
NOTICE

When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Maintenance

1. Remove the clip using a flat-tip screwdriver,
and push up the inner fender.

Inner Fender

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.

Clip

* Not available on all models

Continued

413

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

414 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights *

Driver side

Bulb

Tab
Coupler

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise on
driver side and clockwise on passenger side
to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it clockwise on driver
side and counter-clockwise on passenger
side.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

1Fog Light Bulbs *
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.

Passenger side

Bulb
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Tab
Maintenance

414

Coupler

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights *
Side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace
the light assembly.

* Not available on all models

Push until the pin
is flat.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

415 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove
the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Bolt

Bulb

Maintenance

Socket

3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
6. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body.

415

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

416 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light Bulbs

Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
1. Remove the cover by prying on the edge
using a flat-tip screwdriver.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.

Cover

2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.

Bulb

Maintenance

416

Socket

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

417 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights

Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights
Brake/tail/rear side marker lights are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is a LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

Maintenance

417

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

418 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Push the lens on the left and pull out the
lens and the socket attached to it.

Lens
Bulb

Maintenance

418

2. Remove the license plate light assembly by
squeezing the tabs on both sides of the
socket.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

419 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the holder
off the wiper arm.

Maintenance

Lock Tab

Continued

419

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

420 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

3. Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.

Blade

Blade
Tab

Maintenance

420

4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the blade should fit in the
indent of the top of the wiper holder.
5. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm
securely.
6. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

421 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
2. Pivot up the bottom end of the wiper blade
until it comes off from the wiper arm.

Wiper Arm

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
rear window.

3. Slide the wiper blade out of the end with
the indent.
Blade

Maintenance

Continued

421

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

422 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Retainers

Holder

Maintenance

422

4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.
u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

423 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and
comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified
pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

Continued

3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.

Maintenance

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa,
0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

1Checking Tires

423

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

424 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuChecking Tires

■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 429

• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

Maintenance

424

1Checking Tires
U.S. models

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 373
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
long trips.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

425 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example

Tire Labeling
Example

1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

1Tire Sizes

Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)

The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.

Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size

Maintenance

Maximum
Tire Load

Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/55R17 94V
215: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).

■ Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

Continued

425

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

426 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

Maintenance

426

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

427 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Continued

For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Maintenance

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

427

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

428 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Maintenance

428

■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.

1Traction

■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

1Temperature

Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

429 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

Maintenance

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

429

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

430 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

Maintenance

430

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

431 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the Maintenance Minder message on the information
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front
Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Maintenance

Front

U.S. models

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 373

431

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

432 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the
law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.

Maintenance

432

For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.

1Winter Tires

3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

433 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Battery
Checking the Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative
terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the information display
will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer.

1Battery

3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 181

• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 96

• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual

A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.

* Not available on all models

Maintenance

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

433

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

434 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuBatteryuCharging the Battery

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

Maintenance

434

1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

435 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

3 WARNING

■ Keys with Remote Transmitter *
Screw

Battery type: CR1620
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.

Battery

1Replacing the Button Battery

3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote
transmitter can cause severe internal burns
and can even lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed
the battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Maintenance

Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.

435

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

436 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

■ Smart Entry Remote *
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.

Battery

Maintenance

436

* Not available on all models

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

437 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system */
climate control system * deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

437

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

438 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loop of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Loop

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or
cause a fire inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

Maintenance

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

438

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

439 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCleaninguInterior Care

■ Floor Mats

1Floor Mats

Unlock

Lock

The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mats.

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *

* Not available on all models

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
resulting in discoloration or stains.
Maintenance

To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

439

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

440 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents.
It can cause a malfunction.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
Maintenance

440

• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

Air Intake Vents

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

441 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Applying Wax

1Applying Wax

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.

■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

Continued

Maintenance

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

441

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

442 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Maintenance

442

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

443 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or
backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 470

• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

1Accessories and Modifications

3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Maintenance

443

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

444 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle
is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other
devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely
affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly
resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

Maintenance

444

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

445 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 446
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 448
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 457
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak....458
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 459
Jump Starting.................................... 460
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 462
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 463

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 465
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 465
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks..................................... 466
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On......................................................467
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 467

If the Electric Parking Brake System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 468
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 469
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 470
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 474
Emergency Towing........................... 475
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate.....476

445

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

446 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools

2WD models

The tools are stored in the cargo area.
Jack

Tool Case
Handling the Unexpected

Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle Bar

446

Detachable Towing Hook

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

447 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuToolsuTypes of Tools

AWD models

Storage Bag
Tool Case

Jack

Detachable Towing Hook

Jack

Handling the Unexpected

Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar
Storage Bag

447

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

448 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.

1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.

Continuously variable transmission models

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

2. Move the shift lever to (P .
Handling the Unexpected

Manual transmission models

2. Move the shift lever to (R .
All models

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 .
*1

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

448

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

449 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is
specially adapted to fit the holder shaft. Do not use
any other tool.

1. Open the cargo area floor lid.

The shape of the tool case varies by model.

Floor Lid

2WD models

Spare Tire

Jack

Take the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar
and jack out of the tool case.
AWD models

Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle
bar out of the tool case.
Tool Case
AWD models

Spare Tire

All models

Handling the Unexpected

2. Take the tool case out of the cargo area.

2WD models

3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

Tool Case

Continued

449

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

450 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

AWD models

4. Turn the jack's end bracket anti-clockwise
to loosen it, then remove the jack.

Jack

All models

Handling the Unexpected

450

5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

The tire to be replaced.

Wheel
Blocks

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

451 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.

451

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

452 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.

3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before
driving.

Jack
Handle
Bar

452

Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle

Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and
can seriously injure the occupants.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

453 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.

Wheel
Nut

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

Continued

453

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

454 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

2WD models

■ Storing the Flat Tire
Wing Bolt
Spacer
Cone

Handling the Unexpected

454

For full-size
tire

For compact
spare tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench, jack
handle bar and jack back in the tool case.
Store the case in the cargo area under the
cargo floor lid.

3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

455 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

AWD models

■ Storing the Flat Tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

1. Put the flat tire in the storage bag provided
with your vehicle.
u The storage bag is in the tool case.
2. Knot the top of the storage bag.
3. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s
end bracket to lock it in place.
4. Securely put the wheel nut wrench and jack
handle bar back in the tool case.

Belt

Rear Anchor

Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Handling the Unexpected

5. Bore through the bag, and pass the holding
belt through the hole of the bag and the
wheel of the flat tire as shown.

3 WARNING

6. Place the flat tire in the cargo area, and
thread the belt through the rear anchor as
shown.
7. Pass the belt through the ring, and tighten
the belt to secure the flat tire in place.

Continued

455

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

456 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

U.S. models

■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 373

Handling the Unexpected

456

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

457 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 460

Checklist
Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 433

If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 470
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 339, 342
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
●

2 Immobilizer System P. 118

Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 93
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 474

If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 475

457

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

458 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Models with smart entry system

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,
and the engine won’t start.
Start the engine as follows.

Handling the Unexpected

458

1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.

ENGINE
START
STOP

2. Depress the brake pedal (continuously
variable transmission) or clutch pedal
(manual transmission) and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds while the
indicator stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

459 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Models with smart entry system

Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.

Continuously variable transmission models

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Canadian continuously variable transmission models

Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.

Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.

Handling the Unexpected

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.

1Emergency Engine Stop

Manual transmission models

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

459

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

460 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure

1Jump Starting

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
u Remove the cover from the under-hood
fuse box.
2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 470

Handling the Unexpected

460

Booster
Battery

2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u Connect when using the automotive
battery charger to boost your 12-volt
battery, select a lower charging voltage
than 15-volt. Check the charger manual
for the proper setting.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do
not connect this jumper cable to any other
part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

461 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuJump Startingu

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s stud bolt.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Handling the Unexpected

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

461

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

462 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Shift Lever Does Not Move
Continuously variable transmission models

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock
1. Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Slot
Cover
Handling the Unexpected

All models

Shift Lock
Release Slot
Release Button

462

Models with smart entry system

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

463 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The high temperature indicator (red) comes on or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

Continued

3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the high temperature
indicator on may damage the engine.

Handling the Unexpected

■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

463

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

464 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do

MAX
MIN

Reserve Tank

1How to Handle Overheating

Handling the Unexpected

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the high temperature
indicator goes off.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the high temperature
indicator.
If the high temperature indicator is off, resume driving. If it stays on, contact a dealer
for repairs.

464

3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

465 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

2 Oil Check P. 402

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system */climate control system *, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.

* Not available on all models

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.

Handling the Unexpected

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

465

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

466 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

■ Check Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.

■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.

466

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

467 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
U.S.

Canada

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

Handling the Unexpected

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

467

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

468 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On

If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes
On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the electric parking brake
system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Avoid using the parking brake and immediately get your vehicle
inspected at a dealer.
■ What to do when the electric parking brake indicator comes on
or blinks at the same time.
Release the parking brake.
Handling the Unexpected

2 Parking Brake P. 377

• If the electric parking brake indicator remains on or blinks even after
releasing the parking brake, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and call a dealer.
u To prevent your vehicle from moving,
Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (P
Manual transmission models

Move the shift lever to (1 or (R
• If only the electric parking brake indicator goes off, immediately get
your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

468

1If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On
If you apply the parking brake, it may not release.
If the electric parking brake indicator also turns on,
the parking brake is still applied.
When the electric parking brake indicator blinks at
the same time as the electric parking brake system
indicator, the system must be checked. The parking
brake may not operate under these conditions.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

469 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

U.S. models

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

469

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

470 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
■ Fuse box A

Handling the Unexpected

Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.

Tab

470

* Not available on all models

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Circuit Protected
Headlight Low Beam Main
CDC *
Hazard
DBW
Wiper *
Stop
IGP
IG Coil
EOP *
INJ *
VST2 *
Main Fan
Starter SW *
MG Clutch
Battery Sensor
Small Light
AFP Main *
Horn
Fog Light *
SBW *

Amps
20 A
(30 A)
10 A
15 A
(30 A)
10 A
15 A
15 A
(10 A)
(20 A)
(30 A)
30 A
(30 A)
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
10 A
(10 A)
10 A
(10 A)
(10 A)

Circuit Protected
21
Back Up Main
22
Audio
23
Sub Fan
24
VST1 *
25
STRLD *
26
IGP CAM *
27
–
28
–
29
Back Up *
30
IGP LAF
31
IGPS
32 Right Headlight Low Beam
33 Left Headlight Low Beam

Amps
10 A
(10 A)
(30 A)
(30 A)
(7.5 A)
(7.5 A)
–
–
(30 A)
(7.5 A)
(7.5 A)
10 A
10 A

*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

471 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Fuse box B

Pull up the cover on the + terminal, then
remove it while pulling out the tab as
shown.
Replacement of engine compartment fuses
should be done by a dealer.

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
a
b
c
d

Circuit Protected
Battery Main
RB Main 1
RB Main 2
CAP Main

Amps
100 A
70 A
80 A
70 A

Tab
Handling the Unexpected

b c

Continued

471

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

472 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Interior Fuse Boxes
■ Fuse box A

Fuse Label

Handling the Unexpected

472

Located behind the instrument panel.
Fuse locations are shown on the label under
the steering column.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.

* Not available on all models

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Circuit Protected
Amps
Door Lock
20 A
–
–
Smart *
(10 A)
Driver Side Door Unlock
10 A
Passenger Side Door Unlock
10 A
Driver Door Unlock
10 A
Driver Door Lock
10 A
Driver’s Power Window
20 A
Passenger’s Power Window 20 A
Rear Left Power Window
20 A
Rear Right Power Window
20 A
Driver Side Door Lock
10 A
Passenger Side Door Lock
10 A
–
–
Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
STS *
(7.5 A)
Sunshade *
(20 A)
Moonroof *
(20 A)
Front Seat Heater *
(20 A)
–
–

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

Circuit Protected
MP Camera *
Washer
Rear Wiper *
A/C
Daytime Running Lights
Starter Cut *
ABS/VSA
SRS
Left Headlight High Beam
ACG
IG Relay
Fuel Pump
SRS
Meter
Mission SOL
Front ACC Socket
ACC
ACC *
Option
Rear Wiper
−
−

Amps
(10 A)
15 A
(10 A)
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
(7.5 A)
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
(7.5 A)
(7.5 A)
10 A
10 A
−
−

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

473 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Fuse box B

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
EPS
IG Main
1

Fuse Label

Cover

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12*1
12*2
13
14
15*1
15*2

Circuit Protected
–
–
ABS/VSA FSR
Deicer *
RR ACC SOCKET *
–
Interior Light
ACC Socket (Console)
−
−
ACC Key Lock
Heated Door Mirror *
A/C Blower SW *
–
Wiper

Amps
–
–
30 A
(10 A)
(20 A)
–
7.5 A
(20 A)
−
−
(7.5 A)
(10 A)
(7.5 A)
–
30 A

*1:Models with smart entry system
*2:Models without smart entry system

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Box Main 2
ABS/VSA Motor
Fuse Box Main 1
Fuse Box Main 3 *
Rear Defogger
EPB L
IG Main2*1
–*2
HTR
EPB R
AWD *

Amps
70 A
30 A*1
50 A*2
50 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
30 A
30 A

Remove the cover by putting the flat-tip
screwdriver into the side slot as shown.

* Not available on all models

473

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

474 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Check the fuses on the battery in the
engine compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a
dealer.

Blown

Fuse Box on the Battery

Handling the Unexpected

3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

Fuse Puller

5. Check the large fuse in the vehicle interior.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.

Combined Fuse

Blown Fuse
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

474

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
2 Fuse Locations P. 470
There is a fuse puller in the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

475 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
All models

■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle’s weight.
NOTICE

2WD models

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
2WD models

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
be transported by the flat bed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 377

Handling the Unexpected

■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.

Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.

475

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

476 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
■ What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.
1. Wrap a cloth around the flat-tip
screwdriver. Put it into the cover as shown
in the image, and open it.

Handling the Unexpected

476

Cover

2. Wrap a cloth around the flat-tip
screwdriver. Put it into the lid as shown in
the image, and open the lid.
Lid

1When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
Follow Up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

477 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWhen You Cannot Open the Tailgateu

3. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while sliding the lever to the right.
Lever

Handling the Unexpected

477

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

478

478 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

479 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 480
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 482
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 483
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 484

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 485
Warranty Coverages ........................ 487
Authorized Manuals......................... 489
Customer Service Information......... 490

479

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

480 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications

■ Engine Specifications

Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Displacement

HR-V

Spark Plugs

2
3
5

■ Fuel
*1

4,001 lbs (1,815 kg)
4,166 lbs (1,890 kg)*2
2,127 lbs (965 kg)*1
2,178 lbs (988 kg)*2
1,873 lbs (850 kg)*1
1,988 lbs (902 kg)*2

■ Air Conditioning
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.3 - 16.0 oz (405 - 455 g)
ND-OIL8
4.27-5.00 cu-in (70-82 cm3)

Information

480

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

* Not available on all models

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
13.2 US gal (50 L)

■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

*1: 2WD
*2: AWD

Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
Quantity

109.8 cu-in (1,799 cm3)
NGK
DILZKR7B11GS
DENSO
DXU22HCR-D11S

U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (High/Low Beam)
Fog Lights *
Side Marker Lights
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights
Brake/Tail/Side Marker Lights
Back-Up Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
High-Mount Brake Light
Side Turn Signal Lights *
Rear License Plate Lights
Interior Lights
Vanity Mirror Light *
Map Lights
Ceiling Light
Cargo Area Light

60/55W (HB2)
35W (H8)
5W
28/8W (Amber)
LED
16W
21W (Amber)
LED
LED
5W
1.8W
8W
8W
5W

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

481 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake/Clutch * Fluid
Specified

■ Engine Oil

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)*1
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)*2

*1: 2WD
*2: AWD

Recommended

Capacity

■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio

■ Manual Transmission Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Change
2.0 US qt (1.9 L)

■ Rear Differential Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

Honda DPSF II
Change

1.318 US qt (1.247 L)

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
Change
including
3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
filter

Capacity

Size
Front
Pressure
psi (kPa[kgf/cm2]) Rear
Size
Compact
Pressure
Spare
psi (kPa[kgf/cm2])
Regular
Wheel Size
Compact Spare
Regular

215/55R17 94V
32 (220 [2.2])
30 (210 [2.1])
T135/90D16 102M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7 1/2J
16 x 4T

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.39 US gal (5.25 L)*1
(change including the remaining
0.13 US gal (0.5 L) in the reserve tank)
1.38 US gal (5.24 L)*2
(change including the remaining
0.13 US gal (0.5 L) in the reserve tank)

*1: Continuously variable transmission models
*2: Manual transmission models

Information

* Not available on all models

481

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

482 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows.
Engine Number

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.

Vehicle Identification Number

Cover

Information

482

Manual Transmission Number/
Continuously Variable Transmission
Number

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

483 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
HondaLink *
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Immobilizer System
Smart Entry System *
Remote Transmitter
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
* Not available on all models

Information

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

483

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

484 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.

484

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

485 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some
states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.

1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Information

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P (continuously variable transmission) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

485

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

486 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (continuously variable) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle
speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it
two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Information

486

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

487 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Information

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.

Continued

487

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

488 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

■ EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Information

488

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Transportation and Air Quality
Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group
Attn: Warranty Complaints
2000 Traverwood Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Email: complianceinfo@epa.gov

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

489 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■ For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information

489

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

490 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda
Customer Services.

U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 100-5E-8A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Information

490

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 482
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

491 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

uuCustomer Service Informationu

■ Disclaimer of Pandora® *
Requirements to access Pandora®
• Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or
iPhone.
• Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com or on your
smartphone)
• Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.
• Android devices must be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices
may be connected via Bluetooth or USB.

Information

* Not available on all models

Limitations
• Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
• Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
• Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at http://
www.pandora.com . Pandora, the
Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used
with permission.
• Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
• Pandora is only available in the United
States.

491

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

492 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 352

Index

492

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 383
Accessories and Modifications ................. 443
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 158
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 406
Engine Oil................................................ 401
Washer.................................................... 410
Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 401
Adjusting
Armrest ................................................... 151
Front Seats .............................................. 142
Head Restraints........................................ 144
Headlights ............................................... 411
Mirrors .................................................... 140
Rear Seats................................................ 148
Steering Wheel ........................................ 139
Adjusting the Sound......................... 189, 211
Air Conditioning System
Climate Control System ........................... 167
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ....................................... 166, 170
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 437
Heating and Cooling System.................... 163

Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System)
Synchronization Mode............................. 174
Air Conditioning System (Heating and
Cooling System)
Cooling ................................................... 166
Heating ................................................... 165
Air Pressure....................................... 425, 481
Airbags........................................................ 44
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 50
Airbag Care............................................... 56
Event Data Recorder.................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 47
Indicator.............................................. 54, 79
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 55
Sensors ..................................................... 44
Side Airbags .............................................. 51
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 53
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................ 372
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 383
Indicator.................................................... 79
Armrest ..................................................... 151
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 182

Audio System ........................................... 178
Adjusting the Sound ....................... 189, 211
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 180
Error Messages ....................................... 233
General Information................................ 237
HDMI® Port ............................................. 180
iPod ................................................ 196, 219
MP3/WMA/AAC ............. 193, 199, 216, 224
Recommended CDs ................................ 237
Recommended Devices ........................... 239
Remote Controls..................................... 182
Security Code ......................................... 181
Theft Protection ...................................... 181
USB Flash Drives...................................... 239
USB Port(s).............................................. 179
Audio/Information Screen ............... 185, 206
Authorized Manuals ................................ 489
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 111
Customize .............................................. 112
Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 380
Indicator ........................................... 76, 380
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator ........................................... 75, 380
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ........ 175
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 180
Average Fuel Economy .............................. 92

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

493 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

B
Battery ...................................................... 433
Charging System Indicator ................ 77, 465
Jump Starting ......................................... 460
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 433
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 435
Belts (Seat).................................................. 35
Beverage Holders..................................... 155
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............ 274, 297
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 69
Brake System ............................................ 377
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 383
Automatic Brake Hold............................. 380
Brake Assist System................................. 384
Foot Brake .............................................. 379
Indicator (Amber)...................................... 74
Indicator (Red) .................................. 74, 467
Parking Brake.......................................... 377
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 74
Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 74
Brake/Clutch System
Fluid ....................................................... 409
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 136

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Bulb Replacement ....................................
Back-Up Lights ........................................
Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights ...........
Fog Lights................................................
Front Side Marker Lights ..........................
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights...............
Headlights ...............................................
High-Mount Brake Light ..........................
Rear License Plate Lights ..........................
Rear Turn Signal Lights ............................
Side Turn Signal, Emergency Indicator
Lights ....................................................
Bulb Specifications ...................................

411
416
417
413
413
412
411
417
418
415
414
480

Index

Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 70
Cargo Cover .............................................. 161
Cargo Floor Box ........................................ 157
Carrying Cargo.................................. 329, 331
CD Player ........................................... 193, 216
Certification Label .................................... 482
Changing Bulbs......................................... 411
Charging System Indicator ................. 77, 465
Child Safety................................................. 57
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 110

Child Seat.................................................... 57
Booster Seats ............................................ 69
Child Seat for Infants................................. 59
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 60
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 64
Larger Children ......................................... 68
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 59
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 61
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 110
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 440
Cleaning the Interior................................ 438
Climate Control System............................ 167
Synchronization Mode............................. 174
Clock............................................................ 96
Coat Hook................................................. 159
Compact Spare Tire .......................... 448, 481
Continuously Variable Transmission ....... 347
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode.................... 352
Creeping ................................................. 347
Kickdown................................................ 347
Operating the Shift Lever........... 21, 349, 351
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 462
Shifting ........................................... 348, 350
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Fluid........................................................ 408
Controls....................................................... 95

493

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

494 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

Coolant (Engine)....................................... 406
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 407
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 406
High Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 79
Overheating............................................. 463
Creeping (Continuously Variable
Transmission)........................................... 347
Cruise Control ........................................... 358
Indicator .................................................... 84
Cup Holders............................................... 155
Customer Service Information ................. 490

Index

494

Daytime Running Lights........................... 133
Dead Battery ............................................. 460
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows.......................................... 166, 170
Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 483
Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 129
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 140
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 402
Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 129
Display Setup .................................... 190, 212
Door Mirrors ............................................. 141

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Doors........................................................... 98
Auto Door Locking .................................. 111
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 111
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator........ 34, 80
Keys .......................................................... 98
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside .............................................. 107
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Outside ........................................... 101
Lockout Prevention System...................... 106
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 427
Driving ...................................................... 327
Braking ................................................... 377
Continuously Variable Transmission......... 347
Cruise Control......................................... 358
Shifting Gear........................................... 354
Shifting Position .............................. 348, 350
Starting the Engine.......................... 339, 342
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 437

E
ECO Assist® System ....................................... 9
ECON Button ............................................ 357
ECON Mode Indicator ................................ 83
Electric Parking Brake
Indicator.................................................... 75
Electric Parking Brake System
Indicator............................................ 75, 468

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 80, 467
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 368
Emergency................................................ 475
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 485
Engine
Coolant .................................................. 406
Jump Starting ......................................... 460
Number .................................................. 482
Oil .......................................................... 401
Starting........................................... 339, 342
Switch Buzzer ......................................... 124
Engine Coolant ........................................ 406
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 407
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 406
High Temperature Indicator ...................... 79
Low Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Overheating............................................ 463
Engine Oil................................................. 401
Adding ................................................... 403
Checking ................................................ 402
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 395
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 77, 465
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 401
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Monoxide) ................................................ 70
Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 440
Exterior Mirrors........................................ 141

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

495 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

F
Features .................................................... 177
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 437
Oil .......................................................... 404
Flat Tire..................................................... 448
Floor Mats ................................................ 439
Fluids
Brake/Clutch ........................................... 409
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 408
Engine Coolant ....................................... 406
Manual Transmission .............................. 408
Windshield Washer ................................. 410
FM/AM Radio ................................... 191, 213
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 82
Folding Down the Rear Seats.................. 149
Folding the Rear Seat Up ........................ 150
Foot Brake ................................................ 379
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 361
Indicator ................................................... 85
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 47
Front Seats
Adjusting ................................................ 142

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Fuel ...................................................... 22, 388
Economy ................................................. 390
Gauge ....................................................... 93
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Recommendation .................................... 388
Refueling ........................................... 22, 388
Fuel Economy............................................ 390
Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 22, 389
Message .................................................. 466
Fuel Fill Door....................................... 22, 389
Fuses .......................................................... 470
Inspecting and Changing ......................... 474
Locations ................................................. 470

Halogen Bulbs .................................. 411, 413
Handling the Unexpected........................ 445
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 274, 297
Menus............................................. 276, 300
Phone Setup.................................... 280, 305
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
Head Restraints ........................................ 144
Headlights................................................. 129
Aiming .................................................... 411
Dimming ......................................... 129, 133
Operating................................................ 129
Heated Door Mirrors................................ 137
Heated Windshield................................... 138
Heating and Cooling System ................... 163
Cooling ................................................... 166
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 166
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 437
Heating ................................................... 165
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 274, 297
High Beam Indicator .................................. 82
Hill Start Assist System ..................... 341, 345
Honda App License Agreement .............. 240
Index

Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 390
Gauge ....................................................... 93
Information ............................................. 388
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Refueling ................................................. 388
Gauges ........................................................ 90
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Manual Transmission ............................... 355
Glass (care) ........................................ 438, 441
Glove Box .................................................. 154

495

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

496 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

Index

496

Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission.......................... 482
Vehicle Identification ............................... 482
Ignition Switch.......................................... 124
Illumination Control
Knob ....................................................... 136
Immobilizer System .................................. 118
Indicator .................................................... 83
Important Handling Information .............. 32
Indicators..................................................... 74
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) .............................. 84
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 79
Automatic Brake Hold........................ 76, 380
Automatic Brake Hold System............ 75, 380
Brake Depressing ....................................... 76
Brake System (Amber)................................ 74
Brake System (Red) ............................ 74, 467
Charging System ............................... 77, 465
CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 84, 359
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 84, 358
Door and Tailgate Open....................... 34, 80
ECON Mode .............................................. 83
Electric Parking Brake................................. 75
Electric Parking Brake System............. 75, 468
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System............................................. 80, 467
Fog Light ................................................... 82
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .............. 85

金曜日

午後１時２３分

High Beam ................................................ 82
High Temperature ..................................... 79
Immobilizer System ................................... 83
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 86
Lights On .................................................. 82
Low Fuel ................................................... 78
Low Oil Pressure................................ 77, 465
Low Temperature ...................................... 79
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 81, 373, 469
Maintenance MinderTM ...................... 84, 395
Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 77, 466
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 36, 78
Security System Alarm ............................... 84
Shift Lever Position .................................... 77
Smart Entry System ................................... 81
Starter System ........................................... 82
Supplemental Restraint System............ 54, 79
Transmission ............................................. 78
Turn Signal................................................ 82
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System ............................................ 80, 368
VSA® OFF .......................................... 80, 369
Washer Level............................................. 84
Information .............................................. 479
Information Display ................................... 91
Instrument Panel ........................................ 73
Brightness Control................................... 136
Interior Lights ........................................... 152
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 140
Internet Radio .................................. 222, 223

J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ................ 446, 452
Jump Starting........................................... 460

K
Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 106
Keys............................................................. 98
Lockout Prevention ................................. 106
Number Tag.............................................. 99
Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 110
Remote Transmitter ................................ 103
Types and Functions.................................. 98
Won’t Turn ............................................... 25
Kickdown (Continuously Variable
Transmission).......................................... 347

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

497 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 365
Indicator ................................................... 86
LaneWatchTM ............................................ 370
LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 62
Lights ................................................ 129, 411
Bulb Replacement ................................... 411
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 133
Fog Lights ............................................... 132
High Beam Indicator ................................. 82
Interior.................................................... 152
Light Switches......................................... 129
Lights On Indicator.................................... 82
Turn Signals ............................................ 129
Load Limits ............................................... 331
Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 98
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 111
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 110
From Inside ............................................. 107
From Outside .......................................... 101
Keys.......................................................... 98
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 106
Using a Key............................................. 105
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 106
Low Battery Charge ................................. 465
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 77, 465
Lower Anchors ........................................... 62
Lubricant Specifications Chart ................ 481
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 331

Maintenance ............................................. 391
Battery .................................................... 433
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 409
Cleaning.................................................. 438
Coolant ................................................... 406
Heating and Cooling System/Climate Control
System................................................... 437
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 395
Oil ........................................................... 402
Precautions.............................................. 393
Radiator .................................................. 407
Remote Transmitter ................................. 435
Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 411
Safety ...................................................... 393
Service Items ........................................... 397
Tires ........................................................ 423
Transmission Fluid ................................... 408
Under the Hood ...................................... 399
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 77, 466
Manual Transmission................................ 354
Reverse Lockout ...................................... 356
Map Lights ................................................ 153
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 331
Meters, Gauges ........................................... 90
Mirrors....................................................... 140
Adjusting................................................. 140
Door........................................................ 141
Exterior.................................................... 141
Interior Rearview ..................................... 140

Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 443
Moonroof ................................................. 123
MP3 ................................... 193, 199, 216, 224
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 386

N
Numbers (Identification).......................... 482

O
Odometer ................................................... 92
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 337
Oil (Engine)............................................... 401
Adding.................................................... 403
Checking................................................. 402
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 395
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 77, 465
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 401
Viscosity .................................................. 401
Opening and Closing the Moonroof....... 123
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 400
Moonroof ............................................... 123
Power Windows ...................................... 121
Tailgate ................................................... 115
Overheating.............................................. 463

Index

497

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

Index

498

498 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

金曜日

午後１時２３分

Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode) ........................................ 21, 352, 353
Pandora® ................................................... 223
Panic Mode ............................................... 120
Parking ...................................................... 385
Parking Brake............................................ 377
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ....... 55
Passing Indicators ..................................... 129
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 202, 227
Power Windows........................................ 121
Precautions While Driving
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility
Vehicle................................................... 346
Rain......................................................... 346
Pregnant Women ....................................... 42
Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 448

Radiator .................................................... 407
Radio (FM/AM) ................................. 191, 213
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 192, 214
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 192, 214
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 485
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
SystemTM .................................................. 372
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 137
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 149
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 140
Refueling .................................................. 388
Fuel Gauge................................................ 93
Gasoline.......................................... 388, 480
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Regulations............................... 375, 427, 483
Remote Transmitter ................................. 103
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 435
Bulbs....................................................... 411
Fuses............................................... 470, 472
Tires ........................................................ 430
Wiper Blade Rubber ........................ 419, 421
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 484
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 92

Safe Driving................................................ 29
Safety Check............................................... 34
Safety Labels .............................................. 71
Safety Message ............................................ 1
Seat Belts .................................................... 35
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 40
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 37
Checking .................................................. 43
Detachable Anchor ................................... 41
Fastening .................................................. 38
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 64
Pregnant Women...................................... 42
Reminder .................................................. 36
Warning Indicator ............................... 36, 78
Seat Heaters ............................................. 162
Seats.......................................................... 142
Adjusting ................................................ 142
Front Seats.............................................. 142
Rear Seats............................................... 148
Security System ........................................ 118
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 83
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 84
Select/Reset Knob ...................................... 91
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 61
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 184
Setting the Clock........................................ 96

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

499 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

午後１時２３分

T
Tachometer ................................................. 90
Tailgate ..................................................... 115
Unable to Open ....................................... 476
Temperature
High Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 79
Tie-down Anchors .................................... 160
Time (Setting) ............................................. 96
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 373
Indicator ............................................ 81, 469
Tires ........................................................... 423
Air Pressure ..................................... 425, 481
Checking and Maintaining....................... 423
Inspection................................................ 424
Labeling .................................................. 425
Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 448
Regulations ............................................. 427
Rotation .................................................. 431
Spare Tire ........................................ 448, 481
Summer .................................................. 432
Tire Chains .............................................. 432
Wear Indicators ....................................... 429
Winter ..................................................... 432
Tools .......................................................... 446
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 333
Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 334
Emergency .............................................. 475

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................................................... 373
Indicator............................................ 81, 469
Transmission ............................. 348, 350, 354
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode.................... 352
Continuously Variable ............................. 347
Fluid........................................................ 408
Manual ................................................... 354
Number................................................... 482
Shift Lever Position Indicator...... 77, 349, 351
Trip Meter................................................... 92
Troubleshooting....................................... 445
Blown Fuse...................................... 470, 472
Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 25
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 26
Emergency Towing.................................. 475
Engine Won’t Start.................................. 457
Noise When Braking.................................. 26
Overheating ............................................ 463
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 448
Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 26, 110
Shift Lever Won’t Move........................... 462
Warning Indicators .................................... 74
Turn Signals .............................................. 129
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 82
Index

Shift Lever .......................... 21, 348, 350, 354
Operation ................................. 21, 349, 351
Releasing ................................................ 462
Won’t Move ........................................... 462
Shift Lever Position Indicator .... 77, 349, 351
Shifting (Transmission) ............ 348, 350, 354
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 40
Side Airbags ............................................... 51
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 53
Siri® Eyes Free........................................... 232
Snow Tires ................................................ 432
Spare Tire ......................................... 448, 481
Spark Plugs ............................................... 480
Specifications ........................................... 480
Specified Fuel ................................... 388, 480
Speedometer.............................................. 90
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 47
Starter System Indicator ............................ 82
Starting the Engine.......................... 339, 342
Does Not Start ........................................ 457
Engine Switch Buzzer...................... 124, 127
Jump Starting ......................................... 460
Steering Wheel
Adjusting ................................................ 139
Stopping ................................................... 385
Summer Tires............................................ 432
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 47
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................ 4, 5, 124

金曜日

499

18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book

500 ページ

２０１７年６月３０日

午後１時２３分

Unlocking the Doors......................... 101, 107
USB Flash Drives........................................ 239
USB Port(s)................................................. 179

Wallpaper ......................................... 187, 209
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 465
Warning Labels........................................... 71
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 487
Watts......................................................... 480
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 429
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ... 446, 452
Window Washers ..................................... 134
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 410
Switch..................................................... 134
Windshield................................................ 134
Cleaning ......................................... 438, 441
Defrosting/Defogging.............. 138, 166, 170
Washer Fluid ........................................... 410
Wiper Blades ........................................... 419
Wipers and Washers................................ 134
Winter Tires
Snow Tires .............................................. 432
Tire Chains .............................................. 432
Wipers and Washers................................. 134
Checking and Replacing Wiper
Blades ........................................... 419, 421
WMA ................................. 193, 199, 216, 224
Worn Tires ........................................ 423, 429

V
Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ....... 482
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) .................. 368
Off Button ............................................... 369
Off Indicator .............................................. 80
System Indicator ........................................ 80
Viscosity (Oil)..................................... 401, 481
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 368

Index

500

金曜日

31T7A620
OM-06208
00X31-T7A-6200

Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2017:06:30 15:37:03+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:07:14 10:05:23-07:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15
Metadata Date                   : 2017:07:14 10:05:23-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:c09b3888-c3d8-42bb-bad1-4b571b55ea0c
Instance ID                     : uuid:fdb579f1-8abd-44c2-8789-8293d46eaa14
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 503

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

AT7A1818OM

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation